WO2022151414A1 - 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备 - Google Patents

一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022151414A1
WO2022151414A1 PCT/CN2021/072298 CN2021072298W WO2022151414A1 WO 2022151414 A1 WO2022151414 A1 WO 2022151414A1 CN 2021072298 W CN2021072298 W CN 2021072298W WO 2022151414 A1 WO2022151414 A1 WO 2022151414A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
srs resource
index value
srs
index
resource set
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072298
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘显达
纪刘榴
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202180062374.4A priority Critical patent/CN116114344A/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2021/072298 priority patent/WO2022151414A1/zh
Priority to EP21918618.6A priority patent/EP4250846A4/en
Priority to JP2023542775A priority patent/JP2024502874A/ja
Publication of WO2022151414A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022151414A1/zh
Priority to US18/344,225 priority patent/US20230344585A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H04L5/0055—Physical resource allocation for ACK/NACK
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0032—Distributed allocation, i.e. involving a plurality of allocating devices, each making partial allocation
    • H04L5/0035—Resource allocation in a cooperative multipoint environment
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/06—TPC algorithms
    • H04W52/14—Separate analysis of uplink or downlink
    • H04W52/146—Uplink power control
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/30—TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/32—TPC of broadcast or control channels
    • H04W52/325—Power control of control or pilot channels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/54—Signalisation aspects of the TPC commands, e.g. frame structure
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/06—TPC algorithms
    • H04W52/08—Closed loop power control
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/06—TPC algorithms
    • H04W52/10—Open loop power control

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to an indication method, a terminal device and a wireless access network device.
  • wireless access For the precoding indication of uplink transmission (eg, based on codebook (CB), non-codebook (NCB) physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission), wireless access
  • the network device can use the transmission precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) field in the downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) or the sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) indication (sounding reference signal indication, SRI) ) field indication.
  • TPMI transmission precoding matrix indicator
  • DCI downlink control information
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • SRI sounding reference signal indication
  • the radio access network device may indicate through the transmit power control (transmitter power control, TPC) field in the DCI.
  • radio access network devices such as multiple transmit receive points (TRPs), as shown in Figure 1
  • TRPs transmit receive points
  • the radio access network devices need to multiplex the current Some indication fields make corresponding indications, such as TPMI, SRI, and TPC.
  • TPMI TPMI
  • SRI SRI
  • TPC transmit receive point
  • the signaling overhead of the relevant indication fields needs to be multiplied correspondingly, which affects the performance and overhead of DCI transmission. Therefore, how to save the DCI signaling overhead becomes an urgent problem to be solved.
  • the present application provides an indication method, which enables saving signaling overhead of transmitting power control indication information in a DCI field of downlink control information received by a terminal device.
  • an indication method including: a terminal device receives resource indication information SRI of a sounding reference signal SRS, where the SRI includes an index value, the index value belongs to a first index value set, and the first index value
  • the set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, and the SRS corresponding to the first index value and the second index value
  • the resource belongs to multiple SRS resource sets, and the first index value and the second index value respectively correspond to different SRS resource sets whose power is to be adjusted; the terminal device sends physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data according to the SRI.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value is SRS resource 1
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the second index value is SRS resource 2
  • the terminal device can receive
  • the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is used, in addition to determining the SRS resource, the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted can also be determined, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • the sending of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data by the terminal device according to the SRI means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the first index value set includes the first index value, the second index value and the third index value, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to the third index value is 1, or , the SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to one SRS resource set.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives SRS resource indication information SRI, the SRI includes an index value, the index value belongs to a first index value set, the The first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same SRS resource, and the first index value corresponds to the second index value
  • the SRS resource belongs to multiple SRS resource sets, and the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets; the terminal device sends the PUSCH according to the SRI.
  • the first index value and the second index value can flexibly indicate the mapping order between the SRS resource/SRS resource set and different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH without increasing the DCI overhead.
  • the index value is the first index value or the second index value
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives a transmission power control TPC Indication information, the TPC indication information is used to adjust the transmission power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets, and the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets ; the terminal device determines the first SRS resource set according to the SRI, wherein the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different.
  • the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information needs to be multiplied according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value is SRS resource 1
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the second index value is SRS resource 2
  • the terminal device can receive
  • indexing the SRS resources in the SRI in addition to determining the SRS resources, the SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted can also be determined, thereby saving the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information.
  • the method further includes: the first SRS resource corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different, wherein the first SRS resource The SRS resources are the SRS resources in the first SRS resource set in the first order.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are the same, but because the sequence of the SRS resources (SRS resource sets) is different, that is, the first SRS resources are different, the sequence (or the first index) value and the second index value of the respective first SRS resources) are used to indicate other information, such as the SRS resources used by the TPC.
  • the method further includes: the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set The SRS resource sets correspond to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • different SRS resource sets correspond to different TRP transmission channels
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH data corresponding to different SRS resource sets on different time-domain units, frequency-domain units, or space units.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the terminal device, grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, the third index value The number of corresponding SRS resource sets is 1; the terminal device determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, and the fourth index value corresponds to the grouping information.
  • the number of SRS resource sets is greater than 1; the terminal device determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRI indication information may include only one of the first index value or the second index value.
  • the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the fourth index value can be simplified.
  • enabling each TRP to do independent power accumulation can improve the energy efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method includes: the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set;
  • the terminal device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the method includes: the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, the first SRS resource and the third index
  • the second SRS resource corresponding to the value belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set.
  • the grouping information corresponding to an SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the terminal device.
  • an indication method including: a radio access network device determines sounding reference signal SRS resource indication information SRI, where the SRI includes an index value, the index value belongs to a first index value set, and the first The index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, and the first index value corresponds to the second index value
  • the SRS resource belongs to multiple SRS resource sets, and the first index value and the second index value respectively correspond to different SRS resource sets whose power is to be adjusted, and the SRI is used to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data; the wireless access network device sends the SRI.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the radio access network device will When the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is sent, in addition to indicating the SRS resource, it can also indicate the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted, thereby saving the signaling overhead of transmitting power control indication information.
  • the use of the SRI to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the first index value set includes the first index value, the second index value and the third index value, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to the third index value is 1, or , the SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to one SRS resource set.
  • the method includes: the radio access network device determines SRS resource indication information SRI, the SRI includes an index value, and the index value belongs to the first index value set , the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, the first index value and the The SRS resources corresponding to the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, and the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, and the SRI is used to instruct the terminal device to send physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data; the radio access network device sends the SRI.
  • the first index value and the second index value can flexibly indicate the mapping order between the SRS resource/SRS resource set and different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH without increasing the DCI overhead.
  • the method includes: the radio access network device determines transmission power control TPC indication information, where the TPC indication information is used to adjust the multiple SRS resources The transmit power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the set, the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets, and the index value is the first index value or the second index value, and the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different; the radio access network device determines the first SRS resource set, and determines the first SRS resource set according to the first SRS resource The set determines the SRI; the wireless access network device sends the TPC indication information.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the radio access network device will When the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is sent, in addition to indicating the SRS resource, it can also indicate the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the use of the SRI to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: the first index value and the first SRS resource corresponding to the second index value are different, wherein the first index value is different
  • the SRS resources are the SRS resources with the first order in the first SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are the same, but because the sequence of the SRS resources (SRS resource sets) is different, that is, the first SRS resources are different, the sequence (or the first index) value and the second index value of the respective first SRS resources) are used to indicate other information, such as the SRS resources used by the TPC.
  • the method further includes: the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set The SRS resource sets correspond to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • different SRS resource sets correspond to different TRP transmission channels
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH data corresponding to different SRS resource sets on different time-domain units, frequency-domain units, or space units.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the radio access network device, grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, and the first index value set The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the three index values is 1; the radio access network device determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, and the The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the fourth index value is greater than 1; the radio access network device determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the fourth index value can be simplified.
  • the method includes: the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set;
  • the radio access network device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the method includes: the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, the first SRS resource and the third index
  • the second SRS resource corresponding to the value belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set.
  • the grouping information corresponding to an SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the radio access network device.
  • a terminal device in a third aspect, includes: a receiving unit, the receiving unit is configured to receive sounding reference signal SRS resource indication information SRI, the SRI includes an index value, and the index value belongs to the first an index value set, the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, the first index value
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the second index value belongs to multiple SRS resource sets, and the first index value and the second index value respectively correspond to different SRS resource sets of the power to be adjusted; a sending unit, the sending The unit sends physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data according to the SRI.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value is SRS resource 1
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the second index value is SRS resource 2
  • the terminal device can receive
  • the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is used, in addition to determining the SRS resource, the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted can also be determined, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • the sending of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data by the terminal device according to the SRI means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the first index value set includes the first index value, the second index value and the third index value, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to the third index value is 1, or , the SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to one SRS resource set.
  • the terminal device includes: a receiving unit, where the receiving unit is configured to receive sounding reference signal SRS resource indication information SRI, where the SRI includes an index value, the The index value belongs to a first index value set, the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same SRS resource, and the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same SRS resource.
  • SRS resources corresponding to an index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, and SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets; the sending unit, the The sending unit is used for sending the PUSCH according to the SRI.
  • the first index value and the second index value can flexibly indicate the mapping order between the SRS resource/SRS resource set and different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH without increasing the DCI overhead.
  • the index value is the first index value or the second index value
  • the terminal device further includes: the receiving unit is further configured to receive Transmission power control TPC indication information, the TPC indication information is used to adjust the transmit power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets, and the first SRS resource set is the multiple SRS resources One of the sets; a processing unit, configured to determine the first SRS resource set according to the SRI, wherein the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different .
  • the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information needs to be multiplied according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value is SRS resource 1
  • the SRS resource to be adjusted corresponding to the second index value is SRS resource 2
  • the terminal device can receive
  • indexing the SRS resources in the SRI in addition to determining the SRS resources, the SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted can also be determined, thereby saving the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information.
  • the terminal device further includes: the first SRS resource corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different, wherein the first SRS resource One SRS resource is the first SRS resource in the first SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are the same, but because the sequence of the SRS resources (SRS resource sets) is different, that is, the first SRS resources are different, the sequence (or the first index) value and the second index value of the respective first SRS resources) are used to indicate other information, such as the SRS resources used by the TPC.
  • the terminal device further includes: the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and the first SRS resource set The two SRS resource sets correspond to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • different SRS resource sets correspond to different TRP transmission channels
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH data corresponding to different SRS resource sets on different time-domain units, frequency-domain units, or space units.
  • the terminal device further includes: the processing unit is further configured to determine grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, the The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the third index value is 1; the processing unit determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the index value is greater than 1; the processing unit determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the fourth index value can be simplified.
  • the terminal device includes: the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set;
  • the processing unit is further configured to respectively determine the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the terminal device includes: the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource is the same as the third SRS resource.
  • the second SRS resource corresponding to the index value belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set.
  • the grouping information corresponding to an SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the terminal device.
  • a radio access network device includes: a processing unit configured to determine SRS resource indication information SRI, where the SRI includes an index value, and the index value belongs to a first index value set, the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, and the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources.
  • SRI includes an index value
  • the index value belongs to a first index value set
  • the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value
  • the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources
  • the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources.
  • SRS resources corresponding to an index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, and the first index value and the second index value respectively correspond to different SRS resource sets whose powers are to be adjusted, and the SRI It is used to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data; the sending unit is used for sending the SRI.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of transmitting the indication information of the power control can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the radio access network device will When the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is sent, in addition to indicating the SRS resource, it can also indicate the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted, thereby saving the signaling overhead of transmitting power control indication information.
  • the use of the SRI to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the first index value set includes the first index value, the second index value and the third index value, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to the third index value is 1, or , the SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to one SRS resource set.
  • the radio access network device includes: a processing unit, the processing unit is configured to determine SRS resource indication information SRI, where the SRI includes an index value, the The index value belongs to a first index value set, the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value, the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, so The SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, and the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple SRS resource sets, the The SRI is used to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data; the sending unit is used for sending the SRI.
  • SRI includes an index value
  • the The index value belongs to a first index value set
  • the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value
  • the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, so
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value belong to multiple S
  • the first index value and the second index value can flexibly indicate the mapping order between the SRS resource/SRS resource set and different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH without increasing the DCI overhead.
  • the radio access network device includes: the processing unit is further configured to determine transmission power control TPC indication information, where the TPC indication information is used to adjust the The transmit power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets, the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets, and the index value is the first index value or the second index value, and the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value is different; the processing unit determines the first SRS resource set, and determines the first SRS resource set according to the first SRS resource set The resource set determines the SRI; the sending unit sends the TPC indication information.
  • TPC indication information is used to adjust the The transmit power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets
  • the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets
  • the index value is the first index value or the second index value
  • the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value is different
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the index values can also indicate the set of SRS resources whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • both the first index value and the second index value correspond to SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set, corresponding to the channel of the first TRP transmission data
  • SRS resource 1 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • the radio access network device will When the index of the SRS resource in the SRI is sent, in addition to indicating the SRS resource, it can also indicate the SRS resource whose power is to be adjusted, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the use of the SRI to instruct the terminal device to send the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, and the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information.
  • the device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the radio access network device further includes: the first SRS resource corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different, wherein, The first SRS resource is the first SRS resource in the first SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are the same, but because the sequence of the SRS resources (SRS resource sets) is different, that is, the first SRS resources are different, the sequence (or the first index) value and the second index value of the respective first SRS resources) are used to indicate other information, such as the SRS resources used by the TPC.
  • the radio access network device further includes: the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and The second SRS resource set corresponds to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • different SRS resource sets correspond to different TRP transmission channels
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH data corresponding to different SRS resource sets on different time-domain units, frequency-domain units, or space units.
  • the radio access network device further includes: the processing unit determines, by the processing unit, grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, the The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the third index value is 1; the processing unit determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value. The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the index value is greater than 1; the processing unit determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the fourth index value can be simplified.
  • the radio access network device includes: the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set SRS resources; the processing unit respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the radio access network device includes: the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource is the same as the first SRS resource.
  • the second SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set.
  • the grouping information corresponding to an SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the radio access network device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program runs, the apparatus is made to perform the first aspect or any one of the first aspects.
  • a chip system comprising: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the first aspect or any one of the first aspects The method in a possible implementation manner; or causing a communication device installed with the chip system to execute the method in the second aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • a communication system including: a first terminal device for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect; a first radio access network device for for performing the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • an apparatus for wireless communication comprising: a unit for implementing the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect; or a unit for implementing the above-mentioned second aspect or the first aspect The method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed by a terminal device, the terminal device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect method in any of the possible implementations.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is run by a wireless access network device, the wireless access network device is made to execute the above-mentioned first step.
  • An eleventh aspect provides an indication method, comprising: a terminal device receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and precoding information of a physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, the precoding information Including information of two precoding matrices; the dimensions of the two precoding matrices are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same; the terminal device sends according to the first indication information Physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data.
  • the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a scenario where a terminal device sends data to multiple TRPs, for example, a scenario where data is sent to two TRPs.
  • the bit field used to indicate the number of transport layers and the bit field where the index value of the TPMI index is located The size is the bit field size based on the combination of all TPMIs.
  • the number of combinations of TPMIs in pairwise combinations is reduced by defining that the dimensions of the precoding matrices indicated by the pairwise TPMIs are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same. , so that the size of the bit field where the index value for indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is located can be reduced, and the signaling overhead of the bit field can be saved.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices are the same.
  • the location of the index value indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is further reduced.
  • the size of the bit field can further save the signaling overhead of the bit field.
  • sending the PUSCH data by the terminal device according to the first indication information includes: the two precoding matrices include a first precoding matrix and a second precoding matrix A precoding matrix, where the first precoding matrix corresponds to the first time-frequency resource occupied by the PUSCH data, and the second precoding matrix corresponds to the second time-frequency resource occupied by the PUSCH data, wherein the The first time-frequency resource and the second time-frequency resource do not overlap; the terminal device sends the PUSCH data on the first time-frequency resource and the second time-frequency resource.
  • a twelfth aspect provides an indication method, comprising: a radio access network device determining first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and precoding information of a physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, the The precoding information includes information of two precoding matrices; the dimensions of the two precoding matrices are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same; the wireless access network device sends the Describe the first indication information.
  • the embodiments of this application can be applied to a scenario where a terminal device sends data to multiple TRPs, for example, a scenario where data is sent to two TRPs.
  • the radio access network device sends data to the terminal device to indicate the number of transport layers and the TPMI index.
  • the bit field size of the bit field where the index value of is located is the bit field size based on the combination of all TPMIs.
  • the number of combinations of TPMIs in pairwise combinations is reduced by defining that the dimensions of the precoding matrices indicated by the pairwise TPMIs are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same. , so that the size of the bit field where the index value for indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is located can be reduced, and the signaling overhead of the bit field can be saved.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices are the same.
  • the location of the index value indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is further reduced.
  • the size of the bit field can further save the signaling overhead of the bit field.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a terminal device, where the terminal device includes: a receiving unit, where the receiving unit is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a transmission layer of a physical uplink shared channel PUSCH number and precoding information, the precoding information includes information of two precoding matrices; the dimensions of the two precoding matrices are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same; sending unit, wherein the sending unit sends physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data according to the first indication information.
  • the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a scenario where a terminal device sends data to multiple TRPs, for example, a scenario where data is sent to two TRPs.
  • the bit field used to indicate the number of transport layers and the bit field where the index value of the TPMI index is located The size is the bit field size based on the combination of all TPMIs.
  • the number of combinations of TPMIs in pairwise combinations is reduced by defining that the dimensions of the precoding matrices indicated by the pairwise TPMIs are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same. , so that the size of the bit field where the index value for indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is located can be reduced, and the signaling overhead of the bit field can be saved.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices are the same.
  • the location of the index value used to indicate the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is further reduced.
  • the size of the bit field can further save the signaling overhead of the bit field.
  • the sending unit sending the PUSCH data according to the first indication information includes: the two precoding matrices include a first precoding matrix and a second precoding matrix A precoding matrix, where the first precoding matrix corresponds to the first time-frequency resource occupied by the PUSCH data, and the second precoding matrix corresponds to the second time-frequency resource occupied by the PUSCH data, wherein the The first time-frequency resource and the second time-frequency resource do not overlap; the sending unit sends the PUSCH data on the first time-frequency resource and the second time-frequency resource.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a wireless access network device, where the wireless access network device includes: a processing unit, where the processing unit is configured to determine first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate physical uplink The number of transmission layers and precoding information of the shared channel PUSCH, the precoding information includes information of two precoding matrices; the dimensions of the two precoding matrices are the same, and the same column of the two precoding matrices is non-zero The number of elements is the same; the sending unit is configured to send the first indication information.
  • the embodiments of this application can be applied to a scenario where a terminal device sends data to multiple TRPs, for example, a scenario where data is sent to two TRPs.
  • the radio access network device sends data to the terminal device to indicate the number of transport layers and the TPMI index.
  • the bit field size of the bit field where the index value of is located is the bit field size based on the combination of all TPMIs.
  • the number of combinations of TPMIs in pairwise combinations is reduced by defining that the dimensions of the precoding matrices indicated by the pairwise TPMIs are the same, and the number of non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices is the same. , so that the size of the bit field where the index value for indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is located can be reduced, and the signaling overhead of the bit field can be saved.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the same column of the two precoding matrices are the same.
  • the location of the index value indicating the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index is further reduced.
  • the size of the bit field can further save the signaling overhead of the bit field.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program runs, the apparatus is made to execute the eleventh aspect or the eleventh aspect above. Instructions for the method in any possible implementation manner, or instructions for causing the apparatus to execute the method in the twelfth aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a chip system, comprising: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the eleventh aspect or the eleventh aspect above The method in any possible implementation manner; or causing the communication device installed with the chip system to execute the method in the twelfth aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect.
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a communication system, including: a first terminal device configured to execute the method in the eleventh aspect or any possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect; a first radio access network device , for performing the method in the twelfth aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect.
  • An eighteenth aspect provides an apparatus for wireless communication, comprising: a unit for implementing the method in the eleventh aspect or any possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect; or a unit for implementing the tenth aspect above A unit of the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect or the twelfth aspect.
  • a nineteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed by a terminal device, the terminal device is made to execute the above-mentioned eleventh aspect or the first The method in any possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is run by a wireless access network device, the wireless access network device causes the wireless access network device to execute the above-mentioned The twelfth aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect.
  • a twenty-first aspect provides an indication method, comprising: a terminal device receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first transmission power control TPC adjustment amount; the terminal device receiving second indication information , the second indication information is used to indicate at least one first sounding reference signal SRS resource and the second indication information is used to indicate the second SRS resource on which the first TPC adjustment amount acts, the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource; the terminal device sends first data on the first SRS resource, and adjusts the power corresponding to the second SRS resource according to the first TPC adjustment amount.
  • the second indication information can indicate both the first SRS resource corresponding to the transmitted uplink data and the second SRS resource on which the TPC adjustment amount acts (here It refers to that the TPC adjustment amount acts on the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to the SRS resource), and the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the sending of the first data by the terminal device on the first SRS resource means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, The terminal device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the power corresponding to the second SRS resource refers to the transmission power of the second data corresponding to the second SRS resource, and the second data is a part of the first data.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device according to the SRS resources in the first parameter group corresponding to the first identifier in the first mapping relationship , determine the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource, wherein the first mapping relationship is used to indicate the correspondence between multiple identifiers and multiple parameter groups, and each parameter group includes at least one for The SRS resource for transmitting data and the SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount acts in the at least one SRS resource for transmitting data, and the second indication information includes the first identifier.
  • the SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount in each parameter group acts belongs to one SRS resource set in the at least one SRS resource set, the At least one SRS resource set is in one-to-one correspondence with at least one communication device.
  • the terminal device determines the third SRS resource according to the first index corresponding to the second identifier in the second mapping relationship, wherein the The third SRS resource is the SRS resource to which the first TPC adjustment amount is accumulated, and the second mapping relationship is used to indicate the mapping relationship between multiple identifiers and multiple indexes, and the first index is the third SRS resource.
  • the index of the SRS resource, and the second indication information includes the second identifier.
  • the second identifier may be the same as the first identifier, and the third SRS resource and the first TPC adjustment amount are associated with the first index, so that the TPC values of the third SRS resources with the same first index can be accumulated.
  • a second index and a third index exist in the second mapping relationship, and the terminal device determines grouping information corresponding to the second index , the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the second index is 1; the terminal device determines the grouping information corresponding to the third index according to the grouping information corresponding to the second index, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the third index The number is greater than 1; the terminal device determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third index include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the terminal The device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the third index includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource corresponds to the second index.
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource
  • the grouping information corresponding to the resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the terminal device.
  • a twenty-second aspect provides an indication method, comprising: a radio access network device determining first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first transmission power control TPC adjustment amount; the radio access network the device determines second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate at least one first sounding reference signal SRS resource and the second indication information is used to indicate the second SRS resource on which the first TPC adjustment amount acts,
  • the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource; the radio access network device sends the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the second indication information can indicate both the first SRS resource corresponding to the transmitted uplink data and the second SRS resource on which the TPC adjustment amount acts (here It refers to that the TPC adjustment amount acts on the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to the SRS resource), and the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the method further includes: the radio access network device determining, according to the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource, the first SRS resource.
  • a first identifier in a mapping relationship wherein the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to SRS resources in a first parameter group corresponding to the first identifier, and the first mapping relationship Used to indicate the correspondence between multiple identifiers and multiple parameter groups, where each parameter group includes at least one SRS resource for transmitting data and an SRS to which the TPC adjustment amount acts in the at least one SRS resource for transmitting data resource, and the second indication information includes the first identifier.
  • the SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount in each parameter group acts belongs to one SRS resource set in the at least one SRS resource set, the At least one SRS resource set is in one-to-one correspondence with at least one communication device.
  • the radio access network device determines a third SRS resource, and determines a second mapping relationship according to the third SRS resource The first index corresponding to the second identifier in , wherein the third SRS resource is the SRS resource to which the first TPC adjustment amount shown is accumulated, and the second mapping relationship is used to indicate the relationship between multiple identifiers and multiple indexes.
  • the first index is the index of the third SRS, and the second indication information includes the second identifier.
  • the second identifier may be the same as the first identifier, and the third SRS resource and the first TPC adjustment amount are associated with the first index, so that the TPC values of the third SRS resources with the same first index can be accumulated.
  • a second index and a third index exist in the second mapping relationship, and the radio access network device determines that the second index corresponds to The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the second index is 1; the radio access network device determines the grouping information corresponding to the third index according to the grouping information corresponding to the second index, and the third index The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the index is greater than 1; the radio access network device determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third index include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the wireless The access network device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the third index includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource corresponds to the second index.
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource
  • the grouping information corresponding to the resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the radio access network device.
  • a twenty-third aspect provides a terminal device, comprising: a receiving unit, where the receiving unit is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first transmission power control TPC adjustment amount; the The receiving unit receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate at least one first sounding reference signal SRS resource and the second indication information is used to indicate the second SRS resource on which the first TPC adjustment amount acts , the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource; a sending unit, the sending unit sends the first data on the first SRS resource, and adjusts it according to the first TPC adjustment amount Power corresponding to the second SRS resource.
  • the second indication information can indicate both the first SRS resource corresponding to the transmitted uplink data and the second SRS resource on which the TPC adjustment amount acts (here It refers to that the TPC adjustment amount acts on the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to the SRS resource), and the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the sending of the first data by the terminal device on the first SRS resource means that in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device determines the corresponding SRS resource according to the index of the SRI indication information, The terminal device uses the transmit antenna corresponding to the SRS resource on the SRS resource, and the terminal device transmits the PUSCH data through the transmit antenna.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and determines the corresponding SRS resources according to the index of the SRI indication information, and one SRS resource corresponds to one precoding matrix , the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase information between the transmitting antennas, and the terminal device performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix.
  • the power corresponding to the second SRS resource refers to the transmission power of the second data corresponding to the second SRS resource, and the second data is a part of the first data.
  • the terminal device further includes: a processing unit, the processing unit according to the first parameter group corresponding to the first identifier in the first mapping relationship
  • the SRS resources in determine the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource, wherein the first mapping relationship is used to indicate the correspondence between multiple identifiers and multiple parameter groups, and each parameter group includes At least one SRS resource for data transmission and an SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount acts in the at least one SRS resource for data transmission, and the second indication information includes the first identifier.
  • the SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount in each parameter group acts belongs to one SRS resource set in the at least one SRS resource set, the At least one SRS resource set is in one-to-one correspondence with at least one communication device.
  • the processing unit determines the third SRS resource according to the first index corresponding to the second identifier in the second mapping relationship, wherein the The third SRS resource is the SRS resource to which the first TPC adjustment amount is accumulated, and the second mapping relationship is used to indicate the mapping relationship between multiple identifiers and multiple indexes, and the first index is the third SRS resource.
  • the index of the SRS, and the second indication information includes the second identifier.
  • the second identifier may be the same as the first identifier, and the third SRS resource and the first TPC adjustment amount are associated with the first index, so that the TPC values of the third SRS resources with the same first index can be accumulated.
  • a second index and a third index exist in the second mapping relationship, and the terminal device determines grouping information corresponding to the second index , the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the second index is 1; the terminal device determines the grouping information corresponding to the third index according to the grouping information corresponding to the second index, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the third index The number is greater than 1; the terminal device determines the transmit power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third index include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the terminal The device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the third index includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource corresponds to the second index.
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource
  • the grouping information corresponding to the resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the terminal device.
  • a twenty-fourth aspect provides a radio access network device, comprising: a processing unit, where the processing unit is configured to determine first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first transmission power control TPC adjustment amount ; the processing unit is used to determine second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate at least one first sounding reference signal SRS resource and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first TPC adjustment amount acts on The second SRS resource, the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource; a sending unit, the sending unit is configured to send the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the radio access network device needs to multiply the signaling overhead of the transmission power control indication information according to the number of TRPs.
  • the second indication information can indicate both the first SRS resource corresponding to the transmitted uplink data and the second SRS resource on which the TPC adjustment amount acts (here It refers to that the TPC adjustment amount acts on the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to the SRS resource), and the second SRS resource is at least one resource in the first SRS resource, so that the signaling overhead of the TPC indication information can be saved.
  • the method further includes: the processing unit determining a first mapping relationship according to the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource The first identifier in , wherein the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the SRS resource in the first parameter group corresponding to the first identifier, and the first mapping relationship is used to indicate The correspondence between multiple identifiers and multiple parameter groups, each parameter group includes at least one SRS resource for transmitting data and the SRS resource on which the TPC adjustment amount acts in the at least one SRS resource for transmitting data, so The second indication information includes the first identifier.
  • the SRS resource to which the TPC adjustment amount in each parameter group acts belongs to one SRS resource set in the at least one SRS resource set, the At least one SRS resource set is in one-to-one correspondence with at least one communication device.
  • the processing unit determines a third SRS resource, and determines, according to the third SRS resource, the corresponding value of the second identifier in the second mapping relationship.
  • the first index wherein the third SRS resource is the SRS resource to which the first TPC adjustment amount is accumulated, and the second mapping relationship is used to indicate the mapping relationship between multiple identifiers and multiple indexes, and the The first index is an index of the third SRS, and the second indication information includes the second identifier.
  • the second identifier may be the same as the first identifier, and the third SRS resource and the first TPC adjustment amount are associated with the first index, so that the TPC values of the third SRS resources with the same first index can be accumulated.
  • a second index and a third index exist in the second mapping relationship, and the radio access network device determines that the second index corresponds to The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the second index is 1; the radio access network device determines the grouping information corresponding to the third index according to the grouping information corresponding to the second index, and the third index The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the index is greater than 1; the radio access network device determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the third index include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the wireless The access network device respectively determines the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the third index includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource corresponds to the second index.
  • the second SRS resource belongs to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index.
  • the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource belong to the same SRS resource set, so that the first SRS resource
  • the grouping information corresponding to the resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the second index value, which can simplify the configuration signaling of the grouping information of the radio access network device.
  • different TRPs can be corresponding, so that although the two different indexes indicate the same SRS resources, but the SRS resources that can indicate that the power adjustment function is different, that is, correspondingly, the power adjustment acts on the transmission power of the transmitted data of different TRPs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an example of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a non-codebook-based uplink transmission mode applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a codebook-based uplink transmission mode applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic interaction diagram of an example of an indication method of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of another example of an indication method of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a radio access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a radio access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the methods of the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, a long term evolution advanced (long term evolution-advanced, LTE-A) system, an enhanced long term evolution (enhanced long term evolution-advanced) system , eLTE), the fifth generation (the 5th Generation, 5G) mobile communication system new radio (new radio, NR) system, can also be extended to similar wireless communication systems, such as wireless fidelity (wireless-fidelity, WiFi), Worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WIMAX), future 6th generation (6G) systems, and 3rd generation partnership project (3gpp) related cellular systems.
  • the application scenarios of the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application may include various application scenarios, such as a homogeneous network scenario, a heterogeneous network scenario, a single TRP scenario, and a multi-TRP scenario (as shown in FIG. 1 ),
  • the TRP is a wireless access network device, a frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) scenario, and a time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) scenario.
  • a radio access network device is a device deployed in a radio access network to provide a wireless communication function for a terminal device, and its functions may be: configuring uplink and downlink resources, and/or sending DCI and other control information, and/or downlink signal transmission and uplink signal reception.
  • Radio access network equipment may include various forms of base stations, macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small cells), relay stations, access points, etc., or various network element equipment in a core network (core network, CN). In systems using different radio access technologies, the names of devices with base station functions may vary.
  • a wireless access network device may be an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a global system for mobile communication (GSM) or a code division Base station (base transceiver station, BTS) in multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA). It may also be a node B (5G nodeB, gNB) in a 5G system or an evolved node B (evolved nodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system.
  • AP access point
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • BTS code division Base station
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • the radio access network device may also be a Node B (Node B) of the third generation (3rd generation, 3G) system, and in addition, the radio access network device may also be a relay station or an access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a Wearable devices and radio access network devices in fifth-generation communication (fifth-generation, 5G) networks or radio access network devices in future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN) networks, etc.
  • Node B Node B
  • 3rd generation, 3G third generation
  • the radio access network device may also be a relay station or an access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a Wearable devices and radio access network devices in fifth-generation communication (fifth-generation, 5G) networks or radio access network devices in future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN) networks, etc.
  • 5G fifth-generation communication
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, terminal equipment unit (subscriber unit), terminal equipment station, mobile station, mobile station (mobile station, MS), A remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal (terminal), a wireless communication device, a terminal device proxy or a terminal device device, with functions that can be: receiving downlink/sidelink signals, and/or uplink /Side line signal transmission.
  • Terminal devices may include various wireless communication capable handheld devices, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • MTC machine type communication
  • station station, ST
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • next-generation communication systems such as terminal equipment in 5G networks or future evolutionary Terminal equipment in the PLMN network, etc.
  • the radio access network device sends a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) to the terminal device.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the terminal device After receiving the CSI-RS, the terminal device obtains the downlink channel quality information by measurement, and calculates the uplink channel quality information according to the channel mutuality, and then designs multiple precoding matrices according to the uplink channel quality information, and based on the multiple precoding matrices
  • a sounding reference signal (SRS) is precoded, and then multiple precoded SRSs are sent.
  • one precoding matrix corresponds to one SRS, and the precoding matrix is used to represent the amplitude and phase between the transmitting antennas.
  • multiple SRSs are respectively carried on multiple SRS resources or SRS ports.
  • the radio access network device After the radio access network device receives multiple precoded SRSs, it means that the radio access network device can obtain different equivalent channels on multiple SRS resources or SRS ports respectively and perform measurement, and indicate the radio access network through DCI instructions.
  • One or more SRS resources or SRS ports recommended by the network access device are sent to the terminal device, for example, indicated by the SRI.
  • the terminal device determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, and performs PUSCH transmission according to the precoding matrix for sending the SRS on the SRS resources indicated by each SRI.
  • the SRS resources indicated by the SRI are in one-to-one correspondence with the DMRS ports of the PUSCH. In this application, it may be referred to as the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the SRI.
  • FIG. 2 it is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a non-codebook-based uplink transmission mode applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the SRI shown in FIG. 2 may be included in the DCI.
  • the SRI field is used to indicate an index of some or all of the SRS resources in the configured multiple SRS resources.
  • the number of SRS resources configured by the terminal device may be configured through radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the maximum number of uplink transmission layers L_max may be configured through radio resource control RRC signaling.
  • the terminal device determines a cell in the table according to the number of configured SRS resources (N_SRS) and the index carried in the SRI field, and the number in the cell represents the index of the SRS resource recommended by the radio access network device , and the number of indices of the SRS resources included in this cell represents the number of PUSCH transmission layers.
  • N_SRS configured SRS resources
  • the determined cells include 1 and 3. It can be seen that the radio access network device
  • the index in Table 1 refers to the index of the bit field mapping (Bit field mapped to index), and the bit field specifically refers to the SRI field.
  • non-codebook-based uplink transmission mode is all examples, which do not constitute a limitation on the non-codebook-based uplink transmission mode described in this application.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is configured in the codebook-based uplink transmission mode, the terminal device sends the SRS to the radio access network device on the SRS resource; the radio access network device measures the channel condition according to the received SRS, and selects Appropriate PUSCH precoding matrix and PUSCH transmission layer number, and then deliver the selected PUSCH precoding matrix and PUSCH transmission layer number to the terminal device through DCI.
  • the PUSCH precoding matrix is specifically: the precoding matrix used for transmitting data through the PUSCH, and the precoding matrix is used to indicate the amplitude and phase information of the transmitting antenna, wherein the transmitting antenna and each port of the SRS resource are in one-to-one correspondence , the row of the precoding matrix corresponds to the transmission antenna or the SRS port in the SRS resource, and the column of the precoding matrix corresponds to the transmission layer of the PUSCH.
  • the terminal may use the PUSCH precoding matrix and the number of PUSCH transmission layers recommended by the radio access network device to perform PUSCH transmission.
  • precoding information and number of layers may be included in the DCI.
  • the DCI may also include an SRI field. in:
  • the SRI field is used to indicate the index of the SRS resource, and the index is used to indicate one SRS resource selected from the configured multiple SRS resources.
  • the terminal device may be configured with 2 SRS resources. If the terminal device is configured with one SRS resource, the DCI may not include the SRI field. If the terminal device is configured with two SRS resources, the terminal device can use different transmit antennas on different SRS resources, or transmit beams with different directivities Sending SRS, through the SRI indication, the wireless access network device notifies the terminal device of the transmission antenna or beam used to send the PUSCH. It can be understood that each row in the precoding matrix corresponds to the information indicated by the wireless access network device. Each SRS port in the SRS resource.
  • the number of SRS resources configured by the terminal device may be configured through RRC signaling. As an example, each SRS resource can be configured with up to 4 SRS ports, wherein the number of SRS ports configured in each SRS resource can be configured through RRC signaling.
  • the precoding information and layer number indication fields are used to carry an index, and the index is used to indicate a transmission rank indicator (TRI) and TPMI.
  • TRI is used to configure the number of PUSCH transmission layers.
  • TPMI is used to configure the PUSCH precoding matrix.
  • the related description about the antenna port field can refer to the following.
  • the index in Table 2 refers to the index of the bit field mapping, and the bit field specifically refers to the precoding information and the layer number indication field.
  • the terminal device may determine a codebook according to the number of SRS ports on which the SRS resources are configured and the TRI indicated by the SRI field, and the TPMI is used to indicate a precoding matrix in the codebook.
  • the codebook is pre-stored in the wireless access network equipment and the terminal equipment, and the number of rows of each precoding matrix in the codebook is the number of SRS ports where the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field is configured, and the number of columns is the number of transport layers indicated by TRI.
  • the number of SRS ports is 2, and the TRI is "1 layer”, then the determined codebook is "Table 6.3.1.5-1
  • the preamble of single-layer transmission of 2 antenna ports Encoding matrix W (Precoding matrix W for single-layer transmission using two antenna ports)", as shown in Table 3.
  • the precoding matrix recommended by the radio access network device is
  • the wireless access network equipment adjusts the transmission power of the terminal equipment through the TPC command (transmission power control command, TPC Command).
  • the radio access network device adjusts the transmit power of the terminal device by sending TPC commands. Based on the TPC command, the terminal device can adjust the uplink transmit power in two ways: accumulation and absolute. In the accumulation mode, the terminal device accumulates the values corresponding to the TPC received from the wireless access network device each time, and the accumulation result is used to adjust the uplink transmit power. It should be understood that the accumulation method of the TPC can make the uplink transmit power The value achieves the effect of dynamically adapting to the current channel state.
  • the terminal device When determining the transmit power of the current uplink transmission, the terminal device needs to accumulate the TPC value indicated when scheduling the current uplink transmission and other TPC values received in the previous period. In the absolute mode, the terminal device directly uses the value corresponding to the TPC received from the wireless access network device each time to adjust the uplink transmit power without accumulating the TPC value indicated by the previous scheduling.
  • the power control mechanism of the power value may be referred to as a closed-loop power control mechanism.
  • the terminal device needs to determine the transmit power of the current uplink transmission according to the transmit power value determined by the open-loop power control mechanism and the transmit power value determined by the closed-loop power control mechanism.
  • the wireless access network device sends the TPC index to the terminal device, and the terminal device looks up the table through the index and according to the way configured by the terminal device to adjust the uplink transmit power, and after finding the corresponding power adjustment value, adjusts the power according to the power adjustment value.
  • the value adjusts the transmit power of the corresponding uplink data.
  • the method of adjusting the transmit power of the terminal equipment is the accumulation method
  • the transmit power value determined by the terminal equipment based on the open-loop power control mechanism is 5dBm
  • the radio access network equipment adjusts the power of the terminal equipment according to Table 4 in the 5G standard.
  • the index value of the TPC field sent by the wireless access network device to the terminal device for the first time is 0.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the index value, it looks up Table 4 and finds that the corresponding cumulative adjustment value is -1dB, then on the basis of 5dBm +(-1dB), then the power of the terminal equipment to send the PUSCH to the wireless access network equipment at this time is 4dBm; the index value of the TPC field sent by the wireless access network equipment to the terminal equipment for the second time is 2, and the terminal equipment receives the After the index value, look up Table 4 to find that the corresponding cumulative adjustment value is 1dB, then +(1dB) on the basis of 4dBm, then the power of the terminal device to send the PUSCH to the wireless access network device at this time is 5dBm, and so on.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of an indication method 100 of the present application.
  • the maximum number of configured SRS resource sets is 2 as an example, and the present application does not exclude the situation that the number of configured SRS resource sets is greater than 2.
  • the radio access network device #A determines the SRI indication information #A1.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 is used to indicate the selection of SRS resources belonging to m SRS resource sets from the configured n SRS resources, where n>1, m ⁇ 1,2 ⁇ , and in the m SRS resource sets All SRS resources are the n SRS resources;
  • one SRS resource set corresponds to a set of SRS open-loop power control parameters
  • different SRS resource sets may correspond to different SRS open-loop power control parameters. Therefore, each TRP can acquire uplink channels according to different SRS resource sets respectively.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 includes an index, the index comes from the first index value set, there are multiple index values in the first index value set, and there are at least two index values in the multiple index values, which is called the first index value.
  • An index value and a second index value the SRS resources corresponding to each index value in the first index value and the second index value belong to two SRS resource sets, namely the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set, the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the index value is the same as the SRS resource corresponding to the second index value but in a different order, which may be the SRS resource in the first SRS resource set in the SRS resource corresponding to the first index value.
  • the SRS resource in the second SRS resource set is at the back; the SRS resource in the second SRS resource set in the SRS resource corresponding to the second index value is at the front (that is, the first SRS resource belongs to the second SRS resource SRS resource set), the SRS resource in the first SRS resource set comes after.
  • the first index value set includes the first index value, the second index value and the third index value, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to the third index value is 1, or , the SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belongs to one SRS resource set.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be referred to as a status value, or a bit field field value.
  • Each index value corresponds to different indication information, for example, different index values correspond to different SRS resources or sets of SRS resources.
  • the corresponding relationship may be pre-stored in the wireless access network device and the terminal device.
  • the first index value set corresponding to the SRI indication information #A1 (the first index value set corresponding to the SRI indication information #A1 in this application can be understood as the index value included in the SRS indication information #A1, and the index value belongs to the The number of indexes in an index value set) depends on the number of configured SRS resources and/or SRS resource sets.
  • the number of SRS resource sets is 1, the number of index values in the first index value set corresponding to SRI indication information #A1 is n, where n is the number of configured SRS resources, and the first index value is n.
  • Each index value in the index value set corresponds to a configured SRS resource, and different index values correspond to different SRS resources; when the number of SRS resource sets is 2, the first index value set corresponding to the SRI indication information #A1 corresponds to The number of index values with the number of SRS resources being 1 is n, and the first index value set further includes at least two index values, such as the first index value and the second index value, and optionally, the third index value. .
  • the SRI indication information #A1 indicates multiple SRS resources (or SRS resource sets)
  • different SRS resources (or SRS resource sets) correspond to different time-frequency resources occupied by the PUSCH.
  • the PUSCH occupies two orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol groups, each OFDM symbol group corresponds to an SRS resource indicated by the SRI indication information, then the transmit antenna on each OFDM symbol group
  • the transmit beam may be determined according to the transmit antenna or transmit beam used to transmit the SRS on the corresponding SRS resource.
  • PUSCH occupies time slot slot 0 and time slot slot 1.
  • the SRI indication information indicates two SRS resources (SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1)
  • slot 0 corresponds to SRS resource 0
  • slot 1 corresponds to SRS resource 1
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH on slot 0 it adopts the sending antenna and sending beam that send SRS on SRS resource 0.
  • the terminal device sends PUSCH on slot 1, it adopts the sending antenna and sending beam that sends SRS on SRS resource 1. etc., as shown in Figure 2.
  • the multiple SRS resources belong to different SRS resource sets respectively, or it can be understood that the SRS resources indicated by the first index value belong to multiple SRS resources gather.
  • the radio access network device #A determines TPC indication information #A2, where the TPC indication information is used to adjust the transmit power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the m SRS resource sets, 1 ⁇ m ⁇ n.
  • the TPC indication information #A2 is only used to adjust the index in the SRI indication information #A1 (it should be understood that the SRS resource indicated by the index in the SRI indication information #A1 in this application can also be expressed as SRI indication information PUSCH transmission corresponding to one of the two SRS resources indicated by the SRS resource indicated by #A1) (referred to in this application as TPC indication #A2 acts on one SRS resource), or TPC indication #A2 only It is used to adjust the PUSCH transmission corresponding to one of the two SRS resource sets indicated by the index in the SRI indication information #A1, and the two SRS resources may belong to different SRS resource sets.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 is used to indicate the SRS resource used by the TPC indication information #A2.
  • the first index value set includes two index values (for example, index value #1 and index value #2), and the two index values correspond to two SRS resources (for example, SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2), and The SRS resource corresponding to the index value #1 is the same as the SRS resource corresponding to the index value #2.
  • the index value #1 is used to indicate that the TPC indication information #A2 acts on the SRS resource 1
  • the index value #2 is used to indicate that the TPC indication information #A2 acts. in SRS resource 2.
  • the TPC indication information #A2 acts on the first SRS resource or the SRS resource in the first SRS resource set indicated by the index of the SRI indication information #A1.
  • the first index value set includes two index values (for example, index value #1 and index value #2), and the two index values correspond to two SRS resources (for example, SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2), and
  • the SRS resource corresponding to index value #1 is the same as the SRS resource corresponding to index value #2
  • the order of SRS resources corresponding to index value #1 is SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2, and the order of SRS resource corresponding to index value #2 is SRS Resource 2, SRS Resource 1.
  • the TPC indication information #A2 acts on the SRS resource 1
  • the TPC indication information acts on the SRS resource 2.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 includes an index value, the index value belongs to the first index value set, and the index value in the first index value set is The number is related to the number of SRS resources n and the maximum number of transmission layers of the currently configured PUSCH.
  • the index value of SRI indication information #A1 can correspond to multiple SRS resources, and the index in SRI indication information #A1
  • the number of SRS resources corresponding to the value is the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH.
  • the index values in the first index value set corresponding to the SRI indication information #A1 include not only the index value corresponding to one SRS resource set, but also at least two index values, such as The above-mentioned first index value and the above-mentioned second index value, optionally, further include the above-mentioned third index value.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 indicates multiple SRS resources (it should be understood that the SRI indication information #A1 in this application indicates the SRS resource, that is, the SRS resource corresponding to the index in the SRI indication information #A1), and
  • the different SRS resource sets correspond to different time-frequency resources occupied by the PUSCH.
  • the PUSCH occupies two OFDM symbol groups, and each OFDM symbol group corresponds to one SRS resource set indicated by the SRI indication information, and the transmit antenna or transmit beam on each OFDM symbol group can be based on the corresponding SRS resource set.
  • the transmit antenna or transmit beam used to transmit the SRS on the SRS resource is determined.
  • PUSCH occupies slot 0 and slot 1, when the SRI indication information indicates two SRS resource sets (SRS resource set 0 and SRS resource set 1) and the SRI indication information indicates SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 in SRS resource set 0 , and when SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in SRS resource set 1, slot 0 corresponds to SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 in SRS resource set 0, and slot 1 corresponds to SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in SRS resource set 1 , then when the terminal device transmits PUSCH on slot 0, it adopts the transmit antenna, transmit beam, etc. to transmit SRS on SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 in SRS resource set 0.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device transmits PUSCH on slot 1, it uses SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in SRS resource set 1 transmit the SRS on the transmit antenna, transmit beam, and the like. At this time, on slot 0 and slot 1, the number of PUSCH transmission layers is both 2 (depending on the number of SRS resources in 1 SRS resource set corresponding to the index in the SRI indication information).
  • the TPC indication information #A2 is only used to adjust the PUSCH transmission corresponding to all SRS resources in one of the two SRS resource sets indicated by the SRI indication information #A1 (hereinafter referred to as the TPC indication information #A2 acts on one SRS resource set).
  • the TPC indication information #A2 is only used to adjust 1 SRS resource set (such as the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set) in the 2 SRS resource sets (such as the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set) indicated by the SRI indication information #A1.
  • the target SRS resource set may be the first SRS resource set in the order of the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRI indication information #A1 is used to indicate the SRS resource or SRS resource set to which the TPC indication information #A1 acts.
  • the first index value set includes two index values (for example, index value #1 and index value #2), and each of the two index values corresponds to two SRS resource sets (including SRS resources) Set 0 and SRS resource set 1), SRS resource set 0 includes SRS resources 0 and 1, SRS resource set 1 includes SRS resources 2 and 3, and the SRS resource corresponding to index value #0 is the same as the SRS resource corresponding to index value #1,
  • the index value #1 is used to indicate that the TPC indication information #A2 acts on SRS resources 0 and/or 1 in the SRS resource set 0, and the index value 2 is used to indicate that the TPC indication information #A2 acts on the SRS resource 2 in the SRS resource set 1 and/or 3.
  • the TPC indication information #A acts on some or all of the SRS resources in the first SRS resource set corresponding to the index in the SRI indication information #A1.
  • the first index value set includes two index values (for example, index value #1 and index value #2), and each index value corresponds to two SRS resource sets (including SRS resource set 0 and SRS resource set). 1), and the SRS resource corresponding to index value #1 is the same as the SRS resource corresponding to index value #2, the SRS resource set indicated in index value #1 is SRS resource set 0, SRS resource set 1 in order, and the index value 2 indicates The SRS resource sets are SRS resource set 1 and SRS resource set 0 in order. Then, for index value 1, TPC indication information #A2 acts on SRS resource set 0, and for index value 2, TPC indication information #A2 acts on SRS resource set 1.
  • the sequence of the SRS resources or the sequence of the SRS resource sets in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as, when configuring the mapping relationship (mapping relationship table) between the SRI indication information index value of the wireless access network device or the terminal device and the SRS resource number (mapping relationship table), naturally
  • the SRS resources or the SRS resource sets are sorted, or the numbers of the SRS resources (the sequence of the SRS resource sets) are arranged according to a certain rule.
  • each fourth index value corresponds to only one SRS resource set
  • each fifth index value corresponds to two SRS resource sets
  • different SRS resource sets correspond to different groups respectively information.
  • the transmission power adjustment values of the PUSCH transmissions corresponding to the SRS resources corresponding to the same grouping information may be accumulated.
  • the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resource set 0 is determined according to the grouping information corresponding to an index value (index value 0) in the fourth index value, and the SRS resource set 1
  • the corresponding grouping information is determined according to the grouping information corresponding to another index value (index value 1) in the fourth index value.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the index value 0 is the same as the SRS resource included in the SRS resource set 0 corresponding to the fifth index value
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the index value 1 is the SRS resource included in the SRS resource set 1 corresponding to the fifth index value. same.
  • each SRS resource only belongs to one SRS resource set, and the SRS sent on each SRS resource set can be independently controlled for power.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be referred to as a state value of the SRI indication information, or an indication value of the SRI indication information.
  • the present application does not exclude the case that the number of configured SRS resource sets is greater than 2.
  • Mode 1 PUSCH transmission based on codebook
  • the codebook-based SRI indication comparison table is shown in Table 5 (assuming that the 2 SRS resources are SRS resources 0 and SRS resource 1).
  • the index value of the SRI indication information SRS resource number 0 0 1 1 2 0,1 3 1,0
  • Table 5 can be understood in conjunction with Table 1, wherein the index value of the SRI indication information in Table 5 may be an index of a bit field mapping of indication information #A, and the bit field may be an SRI field. For example, when the index value of the SRI field is 0, the corresponding SRS resource is SRS#0; when the index value of the SRI field is 2, the corresponding SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#1.
  • the radio access network device #A instructs the terminal device #A to select a transmit beam/transmit antenna group according to the SRS resource.
  • the SRS resources in different SRS resource sets can be numbered independently, that is: in SRS resource sets 0 and 1, the SRS resource numbering starts from 0, and at this time, the SRS resource sets are used to distinguish the same number.
  • the SRS resources in different SRS resource sets can be numbered jointly, that is, the SRS resource numbers in the SRS resource set 0 are numbered first (starting from 0), and then the SRS resource numbers in the SRS resource set 1 are numbered. Each SRS resource has different numbers.
  • the radio access network device #A can group SRS resources. For example, when there are two TRPs, the SRS resources are grouped according to the number of TRPs, and SRS#0 is configured as the first SRS resource set, then SRS#0 corresponds to The channel from terminal device #A to TRP#0; if SRS#1 is configured as the second SRS resource set, then SRS#1 corresponds to the channel from terminal device #A to TRP#1.
  • Different SRS resource sets can independently determine the SRS transmit power. When the index is 0 or 1, it indicates that there is 1 TRP to receive the data sent by the terminal device #A, and when the index is 2 or 3, it indicates that there are 2 TRPs to receive the data sent by the terminal device #A.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the index value of the SRI indication information is the specified SRS resource, such as Table 5.1.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information in Table 5.1 is the index of the bit field mapping of the indication information #A, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount refers to the transmission power of uplink data adjusted by the TPC adjustment amount, and the uplink data is sent according to the SRS resource.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to index 2 and index 3 is the specified SRS#1, or both can be SRS#0, or index 2 corresponds to SRS#0, index 3 corresponds to SRS#1, and this application corresponds to the index
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is not limited.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the index value of the SRI indication information is contracted to be the first SRS resource or the second SRS resource in the SRS resource combination, and so on; based on Table 5, it can also be contracted to be the first SRS resource Part or all of the SRS resources in the resource set or part or all of the SRS resources in the second SRS resource set, for example, Table 5.2.
  • the radio access network device #A After the radio access network device #A groups the SRS resources, it determines the index of the SRI field according to the SRS resource or SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and generates an indication according to the index and/or the TPC adjustment amount.
  • Information #A For example, the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resource is SRS#0, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0. Since SRS#0 corresponds to TRP#0, it can be understood that the TPC adjustment amount takes effect at TRP#0, the index value of the SRI field can be determined to be 0 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#1, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0, it can be determined that the SRS resource sequence is SRS#0 first (that is, The first SRS resource is SRS#0), followed by SRS#1 (ie, the second SRS resource is SRS#1). According to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, the index value of the corresponding SRI field can be determined to be 2.
  • the radio access network device #A can configure the grouping information associated with the SRS resource, such as the t value (it should be noted that in this application, the t value may refer to the grouping information), so that the same t is associated with the SRS resource.
  • the TPC value corresponding to the SRS resource of the value can be accumulated, and there are mode A and mode B.
  • each SRS resource corresponding to each index is associated with a t value.
  • the t value of the TPC action corresponding to each index may be specified, that is, the t value is associated with the index value of the SRI indication information.
  • each DCI signaling includes a TPC indication, and the t value of the TPC function is used to indicate that the TPC corresponding to the SRS resource associated with the t value is accumulated. It is assumed that both SRS#0 and SRS#1 correspondingly accumulated TPC initial values are 0dB.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information #0 #1 #2 #3 TPC adjustment amount 1dB 3dB -1dB 3dB PUSCH transmission timing 0 1 2 3 Cumulative TPC corresponding to SRS#0 1dB 1dB 0dB 3dB Cumulative TPC corresponding to SRS#1 0dB 3dB 3dB 3dB
  • each SRS resource is associated with a different t value.
  • the t value of the TPC function is accumulated separately.
  • the accumulated TPC corresponding to SRS#0 is 0dB
  • SRS# 1 corresponds to a cumulative TPC of 2dB.
  • the SRS resources configured with the same resource set are associated with the same t value, and the TPC values corresponding to the SRS resources with the same t value can be accumulated, for example, as shown in Table 7.
  • the values of the t value and the TPC adjustment amount are only examples, and do not constitute a limitation to the present application.
  • the t value of the TPC action corresponding to each index may be the t value corresponding to the SRS resource set (ie, the first SRS resource set) in the preceding sequence.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be configured to be associated with the t value.
  • the index values 0 and 1 of the SRI indication information are respectively associated with different t values, 0 and 1, then the index values 0 and 1 of the SRI indication information are the first index values, and the index values of the SRI indication information are the first index values.
  • the index values 2 and 3 are the second index values, and the grouping information associated with the index values 2 and 3 is determined according to the index values 0 and 1.
  • the index values 2 and 3 can be configured without displaying the t value.
  • the second index value may also display an associated t value.
  • the t value is only associated with the first SRS resource set among the multiple SRS resource sets indicated by the second index value.
  • SRS#0 belongs to the first SRS resource set, and its associated t value is 0, then the SRI domain index value is 0, and the t values associated with SRS#0 in 2 and 3 are both 0; SRS#1 belongs to For the second SRS resource set, the associated t value is 1, the SRI field index value is 1, and the t values associated with SRS#1 in 2 and 3 are both 1.
  • Table 8 the description of calculating the cumulative TPC according to the t value is carried out. It is assumed that both SRS#0 and SRS#1 correspondingly accumulated TPC initial values are 0dB.
  • the accumulated TPC value corresponding to SRS#0 with a t value of 0 is 2dB
  • the accumulated TPC value corresponding to SRS#1 with a t value of 1 is associated with 6dB.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information SRS resource number 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 0,2
  • Table 9 can be understood in conjunction with Table 1, wherein the index value of the SRI indication information in Table 9 is the index of the bit field mapping of the indication information #A, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is SRS#0; when the index value of the SRI field is 4, the corresponding SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#2.
  • the radio access network device #A instructs the terminal device #A to select a transmit beam/transmit antenna group according to the SRS resource.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information SRS resource number 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 0,2 5 1,3 6 2,0 7 3,1
  • SRS resource set 0 includes SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1
  • SRS resource set 1 includes SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3.
  • SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 2 include the same number of SRS ports (eg, both include 4 SRS ports), and SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 3 include the same number of SRS ports (eg, both include 2 SRS ports).
  • Radio access network device #A can group SRS resources. For example, when there are two TRPs, the SRS resources are grouped according to the number of TRPs, and SRS#0 and SRS#1 are configured as the first SRS resource set, then SRS#0 and SRS#1 correspond to the channel from terminal equipment #A to TRP#0; if SRS#2 and SRS#3 are configured as the second SRS resource set, then SRS#2 and SRS#3 correspond to terminal equipment #A to TRP Channel #1.
  • Different SRS resource sets can independently determine the SRS transmit power.
  • the index When the index is 0-3, it indicates that one TRP receives the data sent by the terminal device #A, and when the index is 4-15, it indicates that there are two TRPs that receive the data sent by the terminal device #A.
  • the order of SRS resources belonging to the same SRS resource set is not limited.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to (functioning) the TPC adjustment amount (also called the TPC indication value) corresponding to each index in the table can be agreed.
  • the radio access network device #A groups the SRS resources, the index of the SRI field is determined according to the SRS resource or SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and an indication is generated according to the index and/or the TPC adjustment amount.
  • Information #A For example, the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resource is SRS#0, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0. Since SRS#0 corresponds to TRP#0, it can be understood that the TPC adjustment amount takes effect at TRP#0, the index value of the SRI field can be determined to be 0 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#2, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is the first SRS resource set (the second SRS resource set), because SRS#0 belong to the first SRS resource set (SRS#2 belongs to the second SRS resource set), it can be determined that the SRS resource sequence is SRS#0 first (that is, the first SRS resource is SRS#0), and SRS#2 is last (SRS#0 #2 is in front, SRS #0 is behind), according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, it can be determined that the index value of the corresponding SRI field is 4 (8).
  • the radio access network device #A can configure the t value associated with the SRS resources, so that the TPC values corresponding to the SRS resources with the same t value can be accumulated, such as mode C, mode D and mode E.
  • the t value is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation to the present application.
  • the t value of the TPC action corresponding to each index may be a specified value, that is, the t value is associated with the index value of the SRI indication information.
  • the cumulative TPC is calculated separately for each SRS resource.
  • Table 11 the description of calculating the cumulative TPC according to the t value is carried out in conjunction with Table 10. It is assumed that the initial value of the accumulated TPC corresponding to SRS#0 and SRS#1 is both 0dB, and the accumulation mode is such as mode a.
  • the accumulated TPC value corresponding to SRS#0 with a t value of 0 is -1dB
  • the accumulated TPC value corresponding to SRS#1 with a t value of 1 is associated with 0dB
  • the TPC accumulation value corresponding to SRS#2 with a t value of 2 is 1dB
  • the TPC accumulation adjustment amount corresponding to SRS#3 with a t value of 3 is 4dB.
  • the SRS resources configured with the same resource set are associated with the same t value, as shown in Table 12, for example.
  • the values of the t value and the TPC adjustment amount are only examples, and do not constitute a limitation to the present application.
  • the t value of the TPC action corresponding to each index may be the t value corresponding to the SRS resource set (ie, the first SRS resource set) in the order or the t value corresponding to the combination of the SRS resources in the order.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be configured to be associated with the t value.
  • the index values 0 to 3 of the SRI indication information are respectively associated with different t values, 0 and 1, then the index values 0 to 3 of the SRI indication information are the first index values, and the index values of the SRI indication information are the first index values.
  • the index values 4 to 15 are the second index values, and the grouping information associated with the index values 4 to 15 is determined according to the index values 0 to 3.
  • the index values 4 to 15 may not be displayed to configure the t value.
  • the second index value may also display an associated t value.
  • the t value is only associated with the first SRS resource set among the multiple SRS resource sets indicated by the second index value. That is, the index values 4 to 15 can display the configuration t value, and the t value corresponds to the first SRS resource set, for example, it can correspond to the SRS resource set that indicates the ordering first.
  • SRS#0 and SRS#1 belong to the first SRS resource set, and the t values associated with SRS#0 and SRS#1 in the SRI field index value 0-15 are both 0; SRS#2 and SRS#3 Belonging to the second SRS resource set, the t values associated with SRS#2 and SRS#3 in the SRI field index value 0-15 are both 1.
  • the SRS resources belonging to the same set are simultaneously accumulated with TPC values.
  • Table 13 as an example, combined with Table 12, the description of calculating the cumulative TPC according to the t value is carried out. It is assumed that the initial value of the accumulated TPC corresponding to SRS#0 and SRS#1 is both 0dB, and the accumulation mode is for example mode b.
  • the cumulative TPC value corresponding to SRS#0 and SRS#1 associated with the same t value is -2dB
  • the SRS#2 and SRS#3 associated with the same t value correspond to The TPC accumulation value of 2dB.
  • the SRS resources in the first SRS resource set are associated with different t values
  • the SRS resources in the second SRS resource set are associated with the same t value, such as Table 14 shown.
  • the value of t is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation to the present application.
  • the t value of the TPC function corresponding to each index can be specified, or it can be agreed according to the order of the SRS resource set.
  • the t value is associated with the index value of the SRI indication information, as shown in Table 14.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be configured to be associated with the t value.
  • the index values 0 to 3 of the SRI indication information are respectively associated with different t values, 0, 1 and 2, then the index values 0 to 3 of the SRI indication information are the first index values, and the index values of the SRI indication information are the first index values.
  • the index values 4 to 15 are the second index values, and the grouping information associated with the index values 4 to 15 is determined according to the index values 0 to 3.
  • the index values 4 to 15 may not be displayed to configure the t value.
  • the second index value may also display an associated t value.
  • the t value is only associated with the first SRS resource set among the multiple SRS resource sets indicated by the second index value. That is, the index values 4 to 15 can display the configuration t value, and the t value corresponds to the first SRS resource set, for example, it can correspond to the SRS resource set that indicates the ordering first.
  • SRS#0 and SRS#1 belong to the first SRS resource set, but the t value associated with SRS#0 is 0, the t value associated with SRS#1 is 2, and the SRI field index value is the SRS in 0-15
  • the t values associated with #0 are all 0, and the t values associated with SRS#1 in the SRI domain index value 0-15 are all 2;
  • SRS#2 and SRS#3 belong to the second SRS resource set, then the SRI domain index value is
  • the t-values associated with SRS#2 and SRS#3 in 0-15 are both 1.
  • the calculation of the cumulative TPC can be analogized with reference to the foregoing manner a and manner b, and details are not described herein again.
  • Mode 2 PUSCH transmission based on non-codebook
  • the non-codebook-based SRI indication comparison table is shown in Table 5. See Table 6 (Method A) and Table 7 (Method B) in Method 1 for the allocation of the resource set and the TPC calculation method.
  • the non-codebook-based SRI indication comparison table is shown in Table 15.
  • the number of transmission layers (Layer, represented by L) at this time corresponds to the SRI field
  • Table 15 can be understood in conjunction with Table 1, wherein the index value of the SRI indication information in Table 15 is the index of the bit field mapping of the indication information #A, and the bit field may be the SRI field. For example, when the index value of the SRI field is 0, the corresponding SRS resource is SRS#0; when the index value of the SRI field is 4, the corresponding SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#2.
  • the radio access network device #A instructs the terminal device #A to select a transmit beam/transmit antenna group according to the SRS resource.
  • the SRI indicates index values 4-11 in Table 15, the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1, and multiple SRS resources correspond to different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH respectively.
  • the SRI indicates an index value of 4
  • the slot 1 occupied by the PUSCH corresponds to the SRS resource 0
  • the slot 2 occupied by the PUSCH corresponds to the SRS resource 1.
  • Radio access network device #A can group SRS resources. For example, when there are two TRPs, the SRS resources are grouped according to the number of TRPs, and SRS#0 and SRS#1 are configured as the first SRS resource set, then SRS#0 and SRS#1 correspond to the channel from terminal equipment #A to TRP#0; if SRS#2 and SRS#3 are configured as the second SRS resource set, then SRS#2 and SRS#3 correspond to terminal equipment #A to TRP Channel #1.
  • Different SRS resource sets can independently determine the SRS transmit power.
  • the index When the index is 0-3, it indicates that 1 TRP receives the data sent by the terminal device #A, and when the index is 4-11, it indicates that there are 2 TRPs that receive the data sent by the terminal device #A.
  • Table 15 among the SRS resources corresponding to the index value of the SRI indication information, there is only one SRS resource belonging to the same SRS resource set at most, indicating that the maximum number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1.
  • the order of SRS resources belonging to the same SRS resource set is not limited.
  • the SRS resources used by the TPC adjustment amount (also called TPC indication value) corresponding to each index in the table can be agreed.
  • the index of the SRI field is determined according to the SRS resource or SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and an indication is generated according to the index and/or the TPC adjustment amount.
  • Information #A For example, when the number of transmission layers is 1, the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resource is SRS#0, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0. Since SRS#0 corresponds to TRP#0, it is understandable For the TPC adjustment amount to take effect in TRP#0, the index value of the SRI field can be determined to be 0 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#2, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is the first SRS resource set (the second SRS resource set). set), since SRS#0 belongs to the first SRS resource set (SRS#2 belongs to the second SRS resource set), it can be determined that the SRS resource sequence is that SRS#0 precedes (that is, the first SRS resource is SRS#0), After SRS#2 (that is, the second SRS resource is SRS#2), the index value of the corresponding SRI field can be determined to be 4 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A can configure the t value associated with the SRS resource (or the SRS resource set), so that the TPC values corresponding to the SRS resources associated with the same t value can be accumulated, and the t value is configured.
  • Manner C, Manner D, and Manner E in Manner 1 and refer to Manner a and Manner b in Manner 1 for the corresponding ways of accumulating TPC, and details are not described herein again.
  • the non-codebook-based SRI indication comparison table is shown in Table 16.
  • the number of transmission layers at this time corresponds to the SRS resource corresponding to the index value of the SRI field
  • the number of SRS resources in the set is shown.
  • the table 16 can be understood in conjunction with Table 1, wherein the index value of the SRI indication information in the table 16 is the index of the bit field mapping of the indication information #A, and the bit field may be the SRI field. For example, when the index value of the SRI field is 0, the corresponding SRS resource is SRS#0; when the index value of the SRI field is 4, the corresponding SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#1.
  • the radio access network device #A instructs the terminal device #A to select a transmit beam/transmit antenna group according to the SRS resource.
  • the radio access network device #A can group the SRS resources. For example, when there are two TRPs, the SRS resources are grouped according to the number of TRPs, and SRS#0 and SRS#1 are configured as the first SRS resource set, then the SRS #0 and SRS#1 correspond to the channel from terminal equipment #A to TRP#0; if SRS#2 and SRS#3 are configured as the second SRS resource set, then SRS#2 and SRS#3 correspond to terminal equipment #A to TRP# 1 channel.
  • Different SRS resource sets can independently determine the SRS transmit power.
  • the index When the index is 0-5, it indicates that one TRP receives the data sent by the terminal device #A, and when the index is 6-15, it indicates that there are two TRPs that receive the data sent by the terminal device #A.
  • Table 16 in the SRS resource set indicated by the SRI index, there are at most two SRS resources, so the maximum number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 2. For example, when the index is 4, both SRS#0 and SRS#1 belong to the first SRS resource set, so the number of PUSCH transmission layers is 2 at this time.
  • SRS#2 belongs to the second SRS resource set
  • SRS#0 belongs to the first SRS resource set
  • each resource set has only one SRS resource, so the number of PUSCH transmission layers is 1 at this time.
  • the order of SRS resources belonging to the same SRS resource set is not limited.
  • the SRS resources used by the TPC adjustment amount (also called TPC indication value) corresponding to each index in the table can be agreed.
  • the radio access network device #A After the radio access network device #A groups the SRS resources, it determines the index of the SRI field according to the SRS resource or SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and generates an indication according to the index and/or the TPC adjustment amount.
  • Information #A For example, when the number of transmission layers is 1, the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resource is SRS#0, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0. Since SRS#0 corresponds to TRP#0, it is understandable For the TPC adjustment amount to take effect in TRP#0, the index value of the SRI field can be determined to be 0 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#2, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is the first SRS resource set (the second SRS resource set). set), since SRS#0 belongs to the first SRS resource set (SRS#2 belongs to the second SRS resource set), it can be determined that the SRS resource sequence is that SRS#0 precedes (that is, the first SRS resource is SRS#0), After SRS#2 (that is, the second SRS resource is SRS#2), the index value of the corresponding SRI field can be determined to be 6 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A can indicate the corresponding TPC adjustment amount by configuring the t value associated with the SRS resource, and the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the SRS resource with the same t value can be accumulated, and the method of configuring the t value Refer to Manner C, Manner D, and Manner E in Manner 1, and refer to Manner a and Manner b in Manner 1 for the corresponding ways of accumulating TPC, and details are not repeated here.
  • the t values configured by SRS#0 and SRS#1 belonging to the same SRS resource set may be different (the t values configured by SRS#2 and SRS#3 may be different), or It means that the TPC adjustment amounts of the uplink transmit power corresponding to SRS#0 and SRS#1 may be different.
  • other embodiments of the present application that can be applied in this manner are also within the scope of protection of the present application, and will not be described in detail elsewhere.
  • the radio access network device #A can configure the t value associated with the SRS resource, so that the TPC value corresponding to the SRS resource associated with the same t value can be accumulated.
  • the method of configuring the t value in Table 16 see Method 1.
  • the way to configure the t value can also be that the t value is not only associated with the SRI indication
  • Some index values in the first index value set of the information are also associated with SRS resources or SRS resource sets corresponding to the remaining index values.
  • the radio access network device #A determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value in the first index value set, wherein the The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the three index values is 1, and the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the fourth index value is greater than 1.
  • the way t-values are configured in Table 16.1.
  • the index value of the SRI indication information may also be configured to be associated with the t value.
  • the index values 0 to 5 of the SRI indication information are associated with different t values, and 0 to 3
  • the index values 0 to 5 of the SRI indication information are the first index values
  • the index value of the SRI indication information 6 to 15 are the second index values
  • the grouping information associated with the index values 6 to 15 is determined according to the index values 0 to 5.
  • the second index value may also display an associated t value.
  • the t value is only associated with the first SRS resource set among the multiple SRS resource sets indicated by the second index value. That is to say, the index values 6 to 15 may display the configuration t value, and the t value corresponds to the first SRS resource set, for example, may correspond to the SRS resource set that indicates the prior ordering.
  • SRS#0 and SRS#1 belong to the first SRS resource set
  • SRS#2 and SRS#3 belong to the second SRS resource set
  • the t value associated with SRS#0 and SRS#1 is 0, that is, the t value associated with the first SRS resource set is 0, and the t value associated with SRS#2 and SRS#3 is 1, that is, the t value associated with the second SRS resource set is 1, and indexes 6-9, 11-14 , the t value associated with each SRS resource is the t value of the set it belongs to.
  • SRS#0 and SRS#1 in index 4 belong to the same resource set, and the t value associated with this index 4 is 2, then the SRS resources in indices 10 and 15 and the SRS resources in index 4 belong to the same set of SRS#0 and SRS
  • the t value associated with #1 is the same as that of index 4, which is 2; similarly, SRS#2 and SRS#3 in index 5 belong to the same resource set, and the t value associated with index 5 is 3, then the SRS in indexes 10 and 15
  • the t value associated with SRS#2 and SRS#3 whose resources belong to the same set as the SRS resource in index 4 is the same as that of index 5, which is 3.
  • the t value associated with index 10 and index 15 is the t value corresponding to the previous SRS resource set, so the t value associated with index 10 is 2, and the t value associated with index 15 is 3.
  • the t value of the TPC function can be specified, that is, the t value is associated with the index value of the SRI indication information, or it can be agreed in accordance with the order of the SRS resources. The specific method is in the above embodiment. For the sake of illustration, details are not repeated here.
  • the non-codebook-based SRI indication comparison table is shown in Table 17.
  • the number of transmission layers at this time corresponds to the SRS resource corresponding to the index value of the SRI field
  • the number of SRS resources in the set is shown.
  • This Table 17 can be understood in conjunction with Table 1, wherein the index value of the SRI indication information in Table 17 is the index of the bit field mapping of the indication information #A, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is SRS#0; when the index value of the SRI field is 4, the corresponding SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#1.
  • the radio access network device #A instructs the terminal device #A to select a transmit beam/transmit antenna group according to the SRS resource.
  • the index is 30-45, the number of transmission layers is 1, and the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x belongs to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , and y belongs to the second SRS resource set ⁇ 4, 5, 6, 7 ⁇ , the combination of SRS resources is (x, y).
  • the index is 46-81, the number of transmission layers is 2, and the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x1 and x2 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , and y1 and y2 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the combination of SRS resources is (x1, x2, y1, y2).
  • the index is 82-97
  • the number of transmission layers is 3
  • the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x1, x2 and x3 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , y, y2 and y3 belong to the second SRS resource set ⁇ 4, 5, 6, 7 ⁇ , then the combination of the SRS resources is (x1, x2, x3, y1, y2, y3).
  • the number of transmission layers is 1, and the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x belongs to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , and y belongs to the second SRS resource set ⁇ 4,5,6,7 ⁇ , the combination of SRS resources is (y,x).
  • the index is 115-150, the number of transmission layers is 2, and the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x1 and x2 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , and y1 and y2 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the combination of SRS resources is (y1, y2, x1, x2).
  • the index is 151-166
  • the number of transmission layers is 3
  • the SRS resource combination rule indicated by SRI(s) is: assuming that x1, x2 and x3 belong to the first SRS resource set ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , y, y2 and y3 belong to the second SRS resource set ⁇ 4, 5, 6, 7 ⁇
  • the combination of the SRS resources is (y1, y2, y3, x1, x2, x3).
  • Radio access network device #A can group SRS resources. For example, when there are two TRPs, the SRS resources are grouped according to the number of TRPs, and SRS#0, SRS#1, SRS#2, and SRS#3 are configured as The first SRS resource set ( ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ in Table 17), then SRS#0, SRS#1, SRS#2 and SRS#3 correspond to the channel from terminal equipment #A to TRP#0; Configure SRS#4, SRS#5, SRS#6 and SRS#7 as the second SRS resource set ( ⁇ 4,5,6,7 ⁇ in Table 17), then SRS#4, SRS#5, SRS #6 and SRS#7 correspond to the channel from terminal device #A to TRP#1.
  • Different SRS resource sets can independently determine the SRS transmit power.
  • the index is 0-29, it indicates that there is 1 TRP to receive the data sent by the terminal device #A; when the index is 30-167, it indicates that there are 2 TRPs that receive the data sent by the terminal device #A (the SRS corresponding to each index).
  • the resources are all composed of SRS resources in two SRS resource sets).
  • Table 17 in the SRS resource set indicated by the SRI index, there are at most 4 SRS resources, so the maximum number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 4. For example, when the index is 4, both SRS#0 and SRS#1 belong to the first SRS resource set, so the number of PUSCH transmission layers is 2 at this time.
  • SRS#0, SRS#1, and SRS#3 all belong to the first SRS resource set, so the number of PUSCH transmission layers is 3 at this time.
  • the order of SRS resources belonging to the same SRS resource set is not limited.
  • the SRS resources used by the TPC adjustment amount (also called TPC indication value) corresponding to each index in the table can be agreed.
  • the radio access network device #A After the radio access network device #A groups the SRS resources, it determines the index of the SRI field according to the SRS resource or SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and generates an indication according to the index and/or the TPC adjustment amount.
  • Information #A For example, when the number of transmission layers is 1, the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resource is SRS#0, and the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is SRS#0. Since SRS#0 corresponds to TRP#0, it is understandable For the TPC adjustment amount to take effect in TRP#0, the index value of the SRI field can be determined to be 0 according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the radio access network device #A determines that the SRS resources are SRS#0 and SRS#4, and the SRS resource set corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount is the first SRS resource set (the second SRS resource set). set), since SRS#0 belongs to the first SRS resource set (SRS#4 belongs to the second SRS resource set), it can be determined that the SRS resource sequence is that SRS#0 precedes (that is, the first SRS resource is SRS#0), After SRS#4 (that is, the second SRS resource is SRS#4), according to the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, it can be determined that the index value of the corresponding SRI field is 30.
  • the radio access network device #A can indicate the corresponding TPC adjustment amount by configuring the t value associated with the SRS resource, and the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the SRS resource with the same t value can be accumulated, and the method of configuring the t value Refer to Manner C, Manner D, and Manner E in Manner 1, and refer to Manner a and Manner b in Manner 1 for the corresponding ways of accumulating TPC, and details are not repeated here.
  • the method of accumulating TPC adopts the method a, when there are 2 or more SRS resources in the SRS resource set corresponding to an index, the TRP corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the index, the TRP All SRS resources in the corresponding SRS resource set are adjusted according to the TPC adjustment amount at the same time.
  • wireless access network device #A sends SRI indication information #A1 and TPC indication information #A2 to terminal equipment #A, and terminal equipment #A receives the SRI indication information #A1 and TPC indication information #A2.
  • the terminal device #A determines the SRS resource, the TRP corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and the transmit power for sending uplink data to the TRP according to the SRI indication information #A1 and the TPC indication information #A2.
  • the terminal device #A determines the index value of the SRI field and the TPC adjustment amount according to the indication information #A, and determines the table to be looked up according to the number of configured SRS resources, for example, in S410 Table 5 or Table 9, it is assumed that terminal device #A is configured with two SRS resources, namely SRS#0 and SRS#1, SRS#0 corresponds to the channel of TRP#0, SRS#1 corresponds to the channel of TRP#1, and the terminal Device #A determines that the corresponding SRS resources in the table are SRS#0 and SRS#1 according to the index, and determines that the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the index is SRS#0 according to the agreement, then terminal device #A adjusts according to the TPC to adjust the power of sending data to TRP#1.
  • the agreed manner reference may be made to manner c and manner d in S110.
  • the terminal device #A can adjust the uplink transmit power for the SRS resource set according to the TPC adjustment amount. If the SRS resource corresponding to the index belongs to two SRS resource sets (the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set), the terminal device #A can put the All or part of the SRS resources are used as the SRS resources corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and when the corresponding data is sent, the TPC adjustment amount is used to adjust the transmit power of the corresponding data.
  • terminal equipment #A may also determine the TRP and/or corresponding to the SRS resource set for which uplink transmit power needs to be adjusted according to the manner in which the t value is associated with manner A, manner B, manner C, manner D or manner E described in S110. Or the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to all or part of the SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the accumulated value of the TPC adjustment amount is calculated in combination with the mode a or the mode b.
  • the terminal device #A determines the index value of the SRI field and the TPC adjustment amount according to the indication information #A, and determines the number of SRS resources to be configured and the maximum number of transmission layers of the PUSCH according to the number of configured SRS resources.
  • the searched table such as Table 15, Table 16 or Table 17 in S110, assumes that terminal device #A is configured with two SRS resources, namely SRS#0 and SRS#1, and SRS#0 corresponds to the channel of TRP#0, SRS#1 corresponds to the channel of TRP#1, terminal device #A determines the corresponding SRS resources in the table as SRS#0 and SRS#1 according to the index, and determines the SRS resource corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount corresponding to the index as SRS# according to the agreement 0, the terminal device #A adjusts the power of sending data to TRP #1 according to the TPC adjustment amount.
  • the agreed manner reference may be made to manner c and manner d in S110.
  • the terminal device #A can adjust the uplink transmit power for the SRS resource set according to the TPC adjustment amount. If the SRS resource corresponding to the index belongs to two SRS resource sets (the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set), the terminal device #A can put the All or part of the SRS resources are used as the SRS resources corresponding to the TPC adjustment amount, and when the corresponding data is sent, the TPC adjustment amount is used to adjust the transmission power of the corresponding data.
  • terminal device #A may also determine the TRP and/or corresponding to the SRS resource set for which uplink transmit power needs to be adjusted according to the manner in which the t value is associated with manner A, manner B, manner C, manner D or manner E described in S110. Or the transmission power of the uplink data corresponding to all or part of the SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the accumulated value of the TPC adjustment amount is calculated in combination with the mode a or the mode b.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an indication method 200 of the present application.
  • the radio access network device #A determines indication information #B, where the indication information #B is used to indicate the indices of the two TPMIs and the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH;
  • the two TPMIs corresponding to each index value in the indication information #B have the following characteristics:
  • the dimensions of the precoding matrices indicated by the TPMI are the same (the number of rows and columns) and the coherence types are the same; and/or,
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the precoding matrix indicated by the TPMI are the same.
  • the coherence types of the precoding matrix include: incoherent, partially coherent and fully coherent.
  • the non-coherent type refers to: only one non-zero power antenna port is used for the transmission of one layer of PUSCH, that is, each column in the precoding matrix has only one non-zero element;
  • the partially coherent type refers to: there are some non-zero elements.
  • the zero-power antenna port is used for the transmission of one layer of PUSCH, that is, only some elements of each column in the precoding matrix are non-zero elements;
  • the fully coherent type refers to: for each layer of PUSCH, all antenna ports are non-zero Power, that is, in the precoding matrix, all elements in each column are non-zero elements.
  • the two TPMIs correspond to different time-frequency resources of the PUSCH respectively.
  • slot 1 occupied by PUSCH corresponds to TPMI1
  • slot 2 occupied by PUSCH corresponds to TPMI2
  • the precoding matrix for sending PUSCH on slot 1 is determined according to TPMI1
  • the precoding matrix for sending PUSCH on slot 2 is determined according to TPMI2.
  • the non-zero antenna ports indicated by the two TPMIs are the same.
  • the DCI overhead can be reduced.
  • the antenna ports selected by the two TPMIs for transmitting the PUSCH have a high probability of being the same, so that the correlation can be used to reduce the two TPMIs number of combinations.
  • the radio access network device #A sends codebook subset configuration information A or B
  • the codebook subset configuration information A is used to indicate that the coherence types of the precoding matrices indicated by the TPMI are the same
  • the codebook subset configuration information A is the same
  • Information B is used to indicate that the positions of non-zero elements in the precoding matrix indicated by the TPMI are the same.
  • the characteristics #A (coherence type) of the precoding matrix for transmitting PUSCH data can be ) determines the combination mode of the two precoding matrices.
  • feature #A includes any of the following:
  • Feature #A1 The number of transmission layers of the precoding matrices indicated by the two TPMIs is the same, and the number of antenna ports for transmitting data corresponding to the precoding matrices indicated by the two TPMIs is the same, that is, the columns corresponding to the two precoding matrices (in the same).
  • the number of non-0 elements in the column of the N, then the number of non-zero elements in the nth column of the two precoding matrices is the same.
  • Table 3 two precoding matrices whose TPMI indexes are 0 and 1 and the number of non-zero elements in the first column are both 1, it is considered that the two precoding matrices correspond to the number of antenna ports for transmitting data same;
  • the precoding matrices indicated by the two TPMIs have the same number of transmission layers and the same waveforms, and the positions of the antenna ports for transmitting data corresponding to the precoding matrices indicated by the two TPMIs are the same, that is, the columns corresponding to the two precoding matrices
  • the positions of the non-zero elements (columns at the same position) are the same, that is, the size of the two precoding matrices is M*N (where M is the number of rows and N is the number of columns), 0 ⁇ m ⁇ M, 0 ⁇ n ⁇ N, then the number of non-0 elements in the n-th column of the two precoding matrices is the same, and the number m of rows where the non-0 elements are located is also the same.
  • the four precoding matrices whose TPMI indexes are 2, 3, 4, and 5 have the same position of the non-zero elements in the first column, and they are both in the first row and the second row, then it is considered that these two
  • the positions of the antenna ports for transmitting data corresponding to the precoding matrix are the same.
  • the corresponding relationship between the combination of the two precoding matrices for transmitting PUSCH data and the index of the TPMI and/or the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH may be as shown in Tables 18-23.
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 18 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 19 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 20 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 21 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs adopts the precoding matrix with the number of antenna ports being 4, the number of transmission layers being 1, and the TPMI index being 0.
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs uses a precoding matrix with 4 antenna ports, 1 transmission layer, and TPMI indexes 4 and 5. The position of the 0 element is the same.
  • the codebook subset partial sum non-correlation
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 22 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs adopts the precoding matrix with the number of antenna ports being 4, the number of transmission layers being 1, and the TPMI index being 0.
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs uses a precoding matrix with 4 antenna ports, 1 transmission layer, and TPMI indexes 4 and 5. The position of the 0 element is the same.
  • the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers in Table 23 refer to the index indicating the bit field mapping of the information #B, and the bit field may be the SRI field.
  • the "codebook subset (codebook Subset)" may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling to indicate the configuration of the codebook subset.
  • the indexes of TPMI indicated by indexes 0-27 correspond to TPMI indexes 0-27 respectively, and the indexes of TPMI indicated by indexes 37-276 are all combinations of pairwise combinations of 12-27 and 16 types with the same index are removed
  • the combinations of the remaining 240 TPMI indexes corresponding to indexes 37-276 are not repeated here.
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs adopts the precoding matrix with the number of antenna ports being 4, the number of transmission layers being 1, and the TPMI index being 0.
  • the precoding matrix representing the PUSCH data sent to the two TRPs adopts a precoding matrix with 4 antenna ports, 1 transmission layer, and TPMI indexes 4 and 5. The positions of the non-zero elements of the matrix are the same.
  • the wireless access network device #A sends the indication information #B to the terminal device #A, and the terminal device #A receives the indication information #B.
  • the terminal device #A determines the corresponding transmission layer number and TPMI index according to the precoding matrix and the transmission layer index value in the indication information #B, and finds the corresponding precoding by looking up the table according to the TPMI index and the transmission layer number matrix.
  • terminal device #A determines the number of PUSCH transmission layers and TPMI indexes corresponding to the two TRPs by looking up tables, such as Table 18 to Table 23, according to the index in indication information #B, and then according to the index of TPMI by looking up Table, this table represents the corresponding relationship between the index of TPMI and the precoding matrix, and determines the precoding matrix corresponding to 2 TRPs, for example, the table "Table 6.3.1.5-1 The precoding matrix W of single-layer transmission of 2 antenna ports" (Precoding matrix W for single-layer transmission using two antenna ports)”.
  • terminal device #A lookup table in this application is only one of the terminal device #A search index (the index value of the SRI indication information, the precoding matrix and the index value of the number of transmission layers) and the SRS resource number or other information. form, this application does not limit the form in which the corresponding relationship is expressed.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the terminal device 300 includes:
  • a receiving unit 310 the receiving unit 310 is configured to receive SRS resource indication information SRI, the index value included in the SRI belongs to a first index value set, and the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value , the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, and the set of SRS resources whose power to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value and the second index value is different;
  • a sending unit 330 where the sending unit 330 sends physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data according to the SRI.
  • the SRI includes the first index value or the second index value
  • the terminal device further includes: the receiving unit 310 is further configured to receive transmission power control TPC indication information, The TPC indication information is used to adjust the transmission power of the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets, and the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets; processing unit 320.
  • the processing unit 320 is configured to determine the first SRS resource set according to the SRI, where the first SRS resource set corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different.
  • the first SRS resource corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different; the first SRS resource set is the SRS resource to which the first SRS resource belongs gather.
  • the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set correspond to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • the processing unit 320 is further configured to determine grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, where the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the third index value is 1; The processing unit 320 determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, and the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the fourth index value is greater than 1; The processing unit 320 determines the transmission power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the processing unit 320 is further configured to respectively determine the SRS resources belonging to the The grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources of the first SRS resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belong to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a radio access network device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, the radio access network device 400 includes:
  • a processing unit 410 the processing unit 410 is configured to determine the SRS resource indication information SRI, the index value included in the SRI belongs to a first index value set, and the first index value set includes a first index value and a second index value , the first index value and the second index value correspond to the same multiple SRS resources, and the SRS resource sets for which the power to be adjusted corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different are different, and the SRI Used to instruct the terminal device to send physical uplink shared channel PUSCH data;
  • a sending unit 420 where the sending unit 420 is configured to send the SRI.
  • the processing unit 410 is further configured to determine transmission power control TPC indication information, where the TPC indication information is used to adjust the PUSCH transmission corresponding to the first SRS resource set in the multiple SRS resource sets
  • the first SRS resource set is one of the multiple SRS resource sets, the SRI includes the first index value or the second index value, and the first index value and the The first SRS resource set corresponding to the second index value is different; the processing unit 410 determines the first SRS resource set, and determines the SRI according to the first SRS resource set; the sending unit 420 sends the TPC indication information.
  • the first SRS resource corresponding to the first index value and the second index value are different; the first SRS resource set is the SRS resource to which the first SRS resource belongs gather.
  • the multiple SRS resource sets further include a second SRS resource set; the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set correspond to different time domain units of the PUSCH.
  • the processing unit 410 determines grouping information corresponding to a third index value in the first index value set, and the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the third index value is 1; the processing The unit 410 determines the grouping information corresponding to the fourth index value in the first index value set according to the grouping information corresponding to the third index value, where the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the fourth index value is greater than 1; the processing unit 410 Determine the transmit power of the PUSCH according to the grouping information.
  • the SRS resources corresponding to the fourth index value include SRS resources belonging to the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resource set; the processing unit 410 respectively determines that the SRS resources belong to the first SRS resource set The grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources of the resource set and the grouping information corresponding to the SRS resources belonging to the second SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the fourth index value includes a first SRS resource, and the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource corresponding to the third index value belong to the same SRS resource set; the grouping information corresponding to the first SRS resource is the same as the grouping information corresponding to the third index value.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 500 includes a transceiver 510 and a processor 520 .
  • the processor 520 is configured to support the terminal device to perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method.
  • the terminal device 500 may further include a memory 530, and the memory 530 is configured to be coupled with the processor 520 and store necessary program instructions and data of the terminal device 500.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory 530, and when the instructions are executed, the terminal device executes the method performed by the terminal device in the above method.
  • the terminal device 300 shown in FIG. 6 may be implemented by the terminal device 500 shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the receiving unit 310 and the transmitting unit 330 shown in FIG. 6 may be implemented by the transceiver 510
  • the processing unit 320 may be implemented by the processor 520 .
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a radio access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the radio access network device 600 includes a transceiver 610 and a processor 620, and the processor 620 is configured to support the radio access network device to perform the corresponding functions of the radio access network device in the above method.
  • the wireless access network device may further include a memory 630, where the memory 630 is configured to be coupled with the processor 620 and store necessary program instructions and data of the wireless access network device.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory 630, and when the instructions are executed, the radio access network device executes the method performed by the radio access network device in the above method.
  • the radio access network device 400 shown in FIG. 7 may be implemented by the radio access network device 600 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the transmitting unit 420 shown in FIG. 7 may be implemented by the transceiver 610
  • the processing unit 410 may be implemented by the processor 620 .
  • this application takes a terminal device and a wireless access network device as examples to describe an indication method, a terminal device, and a wireless access network device in the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that an indication method in this embodiment of the present application may also be implemented by two baseband chips, and the first baseband chip in the two baseband chips is used to implement related operations of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the two baseband chips The second baseband chip in is used to implement the related operations of the radio access network device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the input/output circuit of the first baseband chip can be used to implement the above-mentioned operations related to the transceiver of the terminal device
  • the input/output circuit of the second baseband chip can be used to implement the above wireless access network The relevant operation of the transceiver of the device.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), dedicated integrated Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded or executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like containing one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, digital versatile disc (DVD)), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备，使能节省终端设备接收的下行控制信息DCI字段中预编码指示信息和传输功率控制指示信息的信令开销。该指示方法包括：终端设备接收SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括的索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同；所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。

Description

一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备 技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，特别是涉及一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备。
背景技术
对于上行传输(比如，基于码本(code book，CB)、非码本(non-code book，NCB)的物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)传输)的预编码指示，无线接入网设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)中的传输预编码矩阵指示(transmission precoding matrix indicator，TPMI)字段或者探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)的指示(sounding reference signal indication，SRI)字段指示。对于PUSCH传输的功率调整指示，无线接入网设备可以通过DCI中的传输功率控制(transmitter power control，TPC)字段指示。当有多个无线接入网设备，例如多个发送接收点(transmit receive point，TRP)，如图1，有2个无线接入网设备接收PUSCH数据时，无线接入网设备需要复用现有的指示字段做相应的指示，例如TPMI、SRI以及TPC，此时需要按照TRP的数量，相应的成倍增加相关指示字段的信令开销，影响了DCI传输的性能和开销。因此，如何节省DCI信令开销成为亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种指示方法，使能节省终端设备接收的下行控制信息DCI字段中传输功率控制指示信息的信令开销。
第一方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：终端设备接收探测参考信号SRS的资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合；所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么 终端设备就可以在接收SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够确定SRS资源，还能够确定待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一索引值集合中包括所述第一索引值，所述第二索引值和第三索引值，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源数量为1，或者，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源属于1个SRS资源集合。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：终端设备接收SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合；所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送PUSCH。
本申请实施例中，通过第一索引值和第二索引值，可以灵活指示SRS资源/SRS资源集合到PUSCH不同时频资源之间的映射顺序且不增加DCI开销。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，所述方法还包括：所述终端设备接收传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个；所述终端设备根据所述SRI确定所述第一SRS资源集合，其中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省TPC的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么终端设备就可以在接收SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够确定SRS资源，还能够确定待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省TPC的指示信息的信令开销。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS 资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
本申请实施例，第一索引值与第二索引值对应的SRS资源相同，但是由于SRS资源(SRS资源集合)顺序不同，即第一个SRS资源不同，可以通过该顺序(或者该第一索引值与第二索引值各自的第一个SRS资源)用来指示其它信息，例如TPC作用的SRS资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
本申请实施例，不同的SRS资源集合对应不同的TRP传输信道，终端设备将不同的SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH数据在不同的时域单元或者频域单元或者空间单元上发送。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述终端设备确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述终端设备根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述终端设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
可选的，在该实施例中，SRI指示信息可以仅包括第一索引值或者第二索引值中的一个。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的分组信息与第三索引值对应的分组信息关联起来，能够简化第四索引值的分组信息的配置信令。同时，使能每个TRP做独立的功率累加，可提高上行传输能效。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述终端设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的第一SRS资源和第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化终端设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第二方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：无线接入网设备确定探测参考信号SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；所述无线接入网设备发送所述SRI。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么无线接入网设备就可以在发送SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够指示SRS资源，还能够指示待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一索引值集合中包括所述第一索引值，所述第二索引值和第三索引值，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源数量为1，或者，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源属于1个SRS资源集合。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：无线接入网设备确定SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；所述无线接入网设备发送所述SRI。
本申请实施例中，通过第一索引值和第二索引值，可以灵活指示SRS资源/SRS资源集合到PUSCH不同时频资源之间的映射顺序且不增加DCI开销。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：所述无线接入网设备确定传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同；所述无线接入网设备确定所述第一SRS资源集合，并根据所述第一SRS资源集合确定所述SRI；所述无线接入网设备发送所述TPC指示信息。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特 位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么无线接入网设备就可以在发送SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够指示SRS资源，还能够指示待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
本申请实施例，第一索引值与第二索引值对应的SRS资源相同，但是由于SRS资源(SRS资源集合)顺序不同，即第一个SRS资源不同，可以通过该顺序(或者该第一索引值与第二索引值各自的第一个SRS资源)用来指示其它信息，例如TPC作用的SRS资源。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
本申请实施例，不同的SRS资源集合对应不同的TRP传输信道，终端设备将不同的SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH数据在不同的时域单元或者频域单元或者空间单元上发送。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述无线接入网设备确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的分组信息与第三索引值对应的分组信息关联起来，能够简化第四索引值的分组信息的配置信令。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述无线接入网设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法包括：所述第四索引值对应 的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的第一SRS资源和第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化无线接入网设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第三方面，提供了一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：接收单元，所述接收单元用于接收探测参考信号SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合；发送单元，所述发送单元根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么终端设备就可以在接收SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够确定SRS资源，还能够确定待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一索引值集合中包括所述第一索引值，所述第二索引值和第三索引值，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源数量为1，或者，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源属于1个SRS资源集合。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备包括：接收单元，所述接收单元用于接收探测参考信号SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应 的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合；发送单元，所述发送单元用于根据所述SRI发送PUSCH。
本申请实施例中，通过第一索引值和第二索引值，可以灵活指示SRS资源/SRS资源集合到PUSCH不同时频资源之间的映射顺序且不增加DCI开销。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，所述终端设备还包括：所述接收单元还用于接收传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个；处理单元，所述处理单元用于根据所述SRI确定所述第一SRS资源集合，其中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省TPC的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么终端设备就可以在接收SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够确定SRS资源，还能够确定待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省TPC的指示信息的信令开销。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备还包括：所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
本申请实施例，第一索引值与第二索引值对应的SRS资源相同，但是由于SRS资源(SRS资源集合)顺序不同，即第一个SRS资源不同，可以通过该顺序(或者该第一索引值与第二索引值各自的第一个SRS资源)用来指示其它信息，例如TPC作用的SRS资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备还包括：所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
本申请实施例，不同的SRS资源集合对应不同的TRP传输信道，终端设备将不同的SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH数据在不同的时域单元或者频域单元或者空间单元上发送。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备还包括：所述处理单元还用于确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述处理单元根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述处理单元根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的分组信息与第三索引值对应的分组信息关联 起来，能够简化第四索引值的分组信息的配置信令。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述处理单元还用于分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的第一SRS资源和第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化终端设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第四方面，提供了一种无线接入网设备，所述无线接入网设备包括：处理单元，所述处理单元用于确定SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；发送单元，所述发送单元用于发送所述SRI。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么无线接入网设备就可以在发送SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够指示SRS资源，还能够指示待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一索引值集合中包括所述第一索引值，所述第二索引值 和第三索引值，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源数量为1，或者，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源属于1个SRS资源集合。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备包括：处理单元，所述处理单元用于确定SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；发送单元，所述发送单元用于发送所述SRI。
本申请实施例中，通过第一索引值和第二索引值，可以灵活指示SRS资源/SRS资源集合到PUSCH不同时频资源之间的映射顺序且不增加DCI开销。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备包括：所述处理单元还用于确定传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同；所述处理单元确定所述第一SRS资源集合，并根据所述第一SRS资源集合确定所述SRI；所述发送单元发送所述TPC指示信息。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现两个索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并通过让该两个索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，使得每个索引值除了可以指示SRS资源，还可以指示待调整功率的SRS资源集合，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。例如第一索引值和第二索引值都对应SRS资源1和SRS资源2，并且SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，SRS资源1属于第一SRS资源集合，对应第一TRP传输数据的信道，第一索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源1，第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源为SRS资源2，那么无线接入网设备就可以在发送SRI中SRS资源的索引时，除了能够指示SRS资源，还能够指示待调整功率的SRS资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备还包括：所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
本申请实施例，第一索引值与第二索引值对应的SRS资源相同，但是由于SRS资源 (SRS资源集合)顺序不同，即第一个SRS资源不同，可以通过该顺序(或者该第一索引值与第二索引值各自的第一个SRS资源)用来指示其它信息，例如TPC作用的SRS资源。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备还包括：所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
本申请实施例，不同的SRS资源集合对应不同的TRP传输信道，终端设备将不同的SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH数据在不同的时域单元或者频域单元或者空间单元上发送。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备还包括：所述处理单元确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述处理单元根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述处理单元根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的分组信息与第三索引值对应的分组信息关联起来，能够简化第四索引值的分组信息的配置信令。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述处理单元分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，所述无线接入网设备包括：所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第四索引值对应的第一SRS资源和第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化无线接入网设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第五方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，使得装置执行如上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的指令，或者使得装置执行如上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的指令。
第六方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法；或者使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第七方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括：第一终端设备，用用于执行如上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法；第一无线接入网设备，用于执行如上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第八方面，提供了一种无线通信的装置，包括：用于实现如上述第一方面或第一方面 任一种可能实现方式中的方法的单元；或者用于实现如上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第九方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被终端设备运行时，使得所述终端设备执行如上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被无线接入网设备运行时，使得所述无线接入网设备执行如上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：终端设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的传输层数和预编码信息，所述预编码信息包括两个预编码矩阵的信息；所述两个预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同；所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
本申请实施例，可以应用于终端设备向多个TRP发送数据的场景，例如向2个TRP发送数据的场景，目前，用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的比特域大小，为基于所有的TPMI两两全组合的情况下的比特域大小。本申请实施例中，通过限定两两组合的TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同，来减少两两组合的TPMI的组合数，从而能够减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，节省该比特域的信令开销。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同。
本申请实施例，通过进一步限定两个预编码矩阵的特征，即两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同，来进一步减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，进一步节省该比特域的信令开销。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息发送PUSCH数据包括：所述两个预编码矩阵包括第一预编码矩阵和第二预编码矩阵，所述第一预编码矩阵对应所述PUSCH数据所占的第一时频资源，所述第二预编码矩阵对应所述PUSCH数据所占的第二时频资源，其中，所述第一时频资源和所述第二时频资源不重叠；所述终端设备在所述第一时频资源和所述第二时频资源上发送所述PUSCH数据。
第十二方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：无线接入网设备确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的传输层数和预编码信息，所述预编码信息包括两个预编码矩阵的信息；所述两个预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同；所述无线接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息。
本申请实施例，可以应用于终端设备向多个TRP发送数据的场景，例如向2个TRP发送数据的场景，目前，无线接入网设备向终端设备发送的用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的比特域大小，为基于所有的TPMI两两全组合的情况下的比特域大小。本申请实施例中，通过限定两两组合的TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同，来减少两两组合的TPMI的组合数，从而能够减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，节省该比特 域的信令开销。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，所述两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同。
本申请实施例，通过进一步限定两个预编码矩阵的特征，即两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同，来进一步减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，进一步节省该比特域的信令开销。
第十三方面，提供了一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：接收单元，所述接收单元用于接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的传输层数和预编码信息，所述预编码信息包括两个预编码矩阵的信息；所述两个预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同；发送单元，所述发送单元根据所述第一指示信息发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
本申请实施例，可以应用于终端设备向多个TRP发送数据的场景，例如向2个TRP发送数据的场景，目前，用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的比特域大小，为基于所有的TPMI两两全组合的情况下的比特域大小。本申请实施例中，通过限定两两组合的TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同，来减少两两组合的TPMI的组合数，从而能够减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，节省该比特域的信令开销。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同。
本申请实施例，通过进一步限定两个预编码矩阵的特征，即两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同，来进一步减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，进一步节省该比特域的信令开销。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述发送单元根据所述第一指示信息发送PUSCH数据包括：所述两个预编码矩阵包括第一预编码矩阵和第二预编码矩阵，所述第一预编码矩阵对应所述PUSCH数据所占的第一时频资源，所述第二预编码矩阵对应所述PUSCH数据所占的第二时频资源，其中，所述第一时频资源和所述第二时频资源不重叠；所述发送单元在所述第一时频资源和所述第二时频资源上发送所述PUSCH数据。
第十四方面，提供了一种无线接入网设备，所述无线接入网设备包括：处理单元，所述处理单元用于确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的传输层数和预编码信息，所述预编码信息包括两个预编码矩阵的信息；所述两个预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同；发送单元，所述发送单元用于发送所述第一指示信息。
本申请实施例，可以应用于终端设备向多个TRP发送数据的场景，例如向2个TRP发送数据的场景，目前，无线接入网设备向终端设备发送的用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的比特域大小，为基于所有的TPMI两两全组合的情况下的比特域大小。本申请实施例中，通过限定两两组合的TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的维度相同，且所述两个预编码矩阵相同列中非零元素的数量相同，来减少两两组合的TPMI的组合数，从而能够减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，节省该比特域的信令开销。
结合第十四方面，在第十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同。
本申请实施例，通过进一步限定两个预编码矩阵的特征，即两个预编码矩阵的相同列中非零元素的位置相同，来进一步减小用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的索引值所在的比特域的大小，进一步节省该比特域的信令开销。
第十五方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，使得装置执行如上述第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的指令，或者使得装置执行如上述第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的指令。
第十六方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如上述第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法；或者使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如上述第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十七方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括：第一终端设备，用于执行如上述第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法；第一无线接入网设备，用于执行如上述第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十八方面，提供了一种无线通信的装置，包括：用于实现如上述第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的单元；或者用于实现如上述第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法方法的单元。
第十九方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被终端设备运行时，使得所述终端设备执行如上述第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被无线接入网设备运行时，使得所述无线接入网设备执行如上述第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十一方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：终端设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一传输功率控制TPC调整量；所述终端设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示至少一个第一探测参考信号SRS资源并且所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源，所述第二SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源；所述终端设备在所述第一SRS资源上发送第一数据，并根据所述第一TPC调整量调整所述第二SRS资源对应的功率。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现第二指示信息既可以指示发送上行数据对应的第一SRS资源，也可以指示TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源(此处指的是TPC调整量作用于SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率)，并且第二SRS资源是第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述终端设备在所述第一SRS资源上发送第一数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源 对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。应理解，所述第二SRS资源对应的功率指的是，所述第二SRS资源对应的第二数据的发射功率，第二数据为第一数据的一部分。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述终端设备根据第一映射关系中与第一标识对应的第一参数组中的SRS资源，确定所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，其中，所述第一映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个参数组之间的对应关系，每个参数组包括至少一个用于传输数据的SRS资源以及所述至少一个传输数据的SRS资源中TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源,所述第二指示信息包括所述第一标识。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，每个参数组中的TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源属于至少一个SRS资源集合中的一个SRS资源集合，所述至少一个SRS资源集合与至少一个通信设备一一对应。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备根据第二映射关系中与第二标识对应的第一索引，确定第三SRS资源，其中，所述第三SRS资源为所示第一TPC调整量累加于的SRS资源，所述第二映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个索引之间的映射关系，所述第一索引是所述第三SRS资源的索引，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二标识。
本申请实施例中，第二标识可以与第一标识相同，通过第一索引来关联第三SRS资源和第一TPC调整量，能够使得第一索引相同的第三SRS资源的TPC值可以累积。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二映射关系中存在第二索引和第三索引，所述终端设备确定所述第二索引对应的分组信息，所述第二索引对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述终端设备根据所述第二索引对应的分组信息确定所述第三索引对应的分组信息，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述终端设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述终端设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第二索引对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第三索引对应的第一SRS资源和第二索引对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化终端设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第二十二方面，提供了一种指示方法，包括：无线接入网设备确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一传输功率控制TPC调整量；所述无线接入网设备确定第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示至少一个第一探测参考信号SRS资源并且所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源，所述第二SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源；所述无线接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现第二指示信息既可以指示发送上行数据对应的第一SRS资源，也可以指示TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源(此处指的是TPC调整量作用于SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率)，并且第二SRS资源是第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述无线接入网设备根据所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，确定第一映射关系中的第一标识，其中，所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源属于与所述第一标识对应的第一参数组中的SRS资源，并且，所述第一映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个参数组之间的对应关系，每个参数组包括至少一个用于传输数据的SRS资源以及所述至少一个传输数据的SRS资源中TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源,所述第二指示信息包括所述第一标识。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，每个参数组中的TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源属于至少一个SRS资源集合中的一个SRS资源集合，所述至少一个SRS资源集合与至少一个通信设备一一对应。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，其特征在于，所述无线接入网设备确定第三SRS资源，并根据所述第三SRS资源确定第二映射关系中的第二标识对应的第一索引，其中，所述第三SRS资源为所示第一TPC调整量累加于的SRS资源，所述第二映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个索引之间的映射关系，所述第一索引是所述第三SRS的索引，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二标识。
本申请实施例中，第二标识可以与第一标识相同，通过第一索引来关联第三SRS资源和第一TPC调整量，能够使得第一索引相同的第三SRS资源的TPC值可以累积。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二映射关系中存在第二索引和第三索引，所述无线接入网设备确定所述第二索引对应的分组信息，所述第二索引对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述第二索引对应的分组信息确定所述第三索引对应的分组信息，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述无线接入网设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第二索引对应的第二SRS资源属于 相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第三索引对应的第一SRS资源和第二索引对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化无线接入网设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第二十三方面，提供了一种终端设备，包括：接收单元，所述接收单元用于接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一传输功率控制TPC调整量；所述接收单元接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示至少一个第一探测参考信号SRS资源并且所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源，所述第二SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源；发送单元，所述发送单元在所述第一SRS资源上发送第一数据，并根据所述第一TPC调整量调整所述第二SRS资源对应的功率。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，在确定向多个TRP发送的上行数据的功率时，需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加TPC指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现第二指示信息既可以指示发送上行数据对应的第一SRS资源，也可以指示TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源(此处指的是TPC调整量作用于SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率)，并且第二SRS资源是第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。还需要理解的是，所述终端设备在所述第一SRS资源上发送第一数据指的是，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，终端设备在该SRS资源上采用该SRS资源对应的发送天线，终端设备通过该发送天线发送PUSCH数据。在基于非码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据SRI指示信息的索引确定对应的SRS资源，并且一个SRS资源对应一个预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息，终端设备根据该预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。应理解，所述第二SRS资源对应的功率指的是，所述第二SRS资源对应的第二数据的发射功率，第二数据为第一数据的一部分。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述终端设备还包括：处理单元，所述处理单元根据第一映射关系中与第一标识对应的第一参数组中的SRS资源，确定所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，其中，所述第一映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个参数组之间的对应关系，每个参数组包括至少一个用于传输数据的SRS资源以及所述至少一个传输数据的SRS资源中TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源,所述第二指示信息包括所述第一标识。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，每个参数组中的TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源属于至少一个SRS资源集合中的一个SRS资源集合，所述至少一个SRS资源集合与至少一个通信设备一一对应。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述处理单元根据第二映射关系中与第二标识对应的第一索引，确定第三SRS资源，其中，所述第三SRS资源为所示第一TPC调整量累加于的SRS资源，所述第二映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个索引之间的映射关系，所述第一索引是所述第三SRS的索引，所述第二指示信息包括所述第 二标识。
本申请实施例中，第二标识可以与第一标识相同，通过第一索引来关联第三SRS资源和第一TPC调整量，能够使得第一索引相同的第三SRS资源的TPC值可以累积。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二映射关系中存在第二索引和第三索引，所述终端设备确定所述第二索引对应的分组信息，所述第二索引对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述终端设备根据所述第二索引对应的分组信息确定所述第三索引对应的分组信息，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述终端设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述终端设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第二十三方面，在第二十三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第二索引对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第三索引对应的第一SRS资源和第二索引对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化终端设备的分组信息的配置信令。
第二十四方面，提供了一种无线接入网设备，包括：处理单元，所述处理单元用于确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一传输功率控制TPC调整量；所述处理单元用于确定第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示至少一个第一探测参考信号SRS资源并且所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源，所述第二SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源；发送单元，所述发送单元用于发送所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息。
目前，终端设备向多个TRP发送上行数据时，无线接入网设备需要按照TRP的数量成倍增加传输功率控制的指示信息的信令开销。本申请实施例中，通过利用SRI字段中剩余的比特位，实现第二指示信息既可以指示发送上行数据对应的第一SRS资源，也可以指示TPC调整量作用于的第二SRS资源(此处指的是TPC调整量作用于SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率)，并且第二SRS资源是第一SRS资源中的至少一个资源，从而可以节省TPC指示信息的信令开销。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述处理单元根据所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，确定第一映射关系中的第一标识，其中，所述第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源属于与所述第一标识对应的第一参数组中的SRS资源，并且，所述第一映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个参数组之间的对应关系，每个参数组包括至少一个用于传输数据的SRS资源以及所述至少一个传输数据的SRS资源中TPC调整量所作用于的SRS资源,所述第二指示信息包括所述第一标识。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，每个参数组中的TPC调整 量所作用于的SRS资源属于至少一个SRS资源集合中的一个SRS资源集合，所述至少一个SRS资源集合与至少一个通信设备一一对应。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述处理单元确定第三SRS资源，并根据所述第三SRS资源确定第二映射关系中的第二标识对应的第一索引，其中，所述第三SRS资源为所示第一TPC调整量累加于的SRS资源，所述第二映射关系用于指示多个标识与多个索引之间的映射关系，所述第一索引是所述第三SRS的索引，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二标识。
本申请实施例中，第二标识可以与第一标识相同，通过第一索引来关联第三SRS资源和第一TPC调整量，能够使得第一索引相同的第三SRS资源的TPC值可以累积。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二映射关系中存在第二索引和第三索引，所述无线接入网设备确定所述第二索引对应的分组信息，所述第二索引对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述第二索引对应的分组信息确定所述第三索引对应的分组信息，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述无线接入网设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述无线接入网设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
结合第二十四方面，在第二十四方面的某些实现方式中，所述第三索引对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第二索引对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引对应的分组信息相同。
本申请实施例，通过将第三索引对应的第一SRS资源和第二索引对应的第二SRS资源的，其中，第一SRS资源和第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合，使得第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第二索引值对应的分组信息相同能够简化无线接入网设备的分组信息的配置信令。
根据本申请实施例的方案，通过利用SRI域预留的比特位，并通过将SRS资源划分为不同的SRS资源集合，从而能够对应不同的TRP，使得不同的两个索引虽然指示的相同的SRS资源，但是能够指示功率调整作用的SRS资源不同，即对应的，功率调整作用于不同的TRP的发送数据的发射功率。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例的应用场景的一例示意图。
图2是可适用于本申请实施例的一种基于非码本的上行传输模式的场景示意图。
图3是可适用于本申请实施例的一种基于码本的上行传输模式的场景示意图。
图4是本申请的一种指示方法的一例示意性交互图。
图5是本申请的一种指示方法的又一例示意性交互图。
图6是根据本申请实施例的终端设备的一例的示意性框图。
图7是根据本申请实施例的无线接入网设备的一例的示意性框图。
图8是根据本申请实施例的终端设备的另一例的示意性框图。
图9是根据本申请实施例的无线接入网设备的另一例的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请实施例的方法可以应用于长期演进技术(long term evolution，LTE)系统，长期演进高级技术(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)系统，增强的长期演进技术(enhanced long term evolution-advanced，eLTE)，第五代(the 5th Generation，5G)移动通信系统新空口(new radio，NR)系统，也可以扩展到类似的无线通信系统中，如无线保真(wireless-fidelity，WiFi)，全球微波互联接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WIMAX)，未来的第六代(6th generation，6G)系统，以及第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3gpp)相关的蜂窝系统。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景可以包括多种，例如同构网络(homogeneous network)场景，异构网络(heterogeneous network)场景，单TRP场景，多TRP场景(如图1所示)，其中TRP是一种无线接入网设备，频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)场景，时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)场景。
本申请实施例中，无线接入网设备是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置，具有的功能可以是：进行上下行资源的配置，和/或发送DCI等控制信息，和/或下行信号发送以及上行信号接收。无线接入网设备可以包括各种形式的基站、宏基站，微基站(也称为小站)，中继站，接入点等，或者核心网(core network，CN)中的各种网元设备。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中，具备基站功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同。例如，无线接入网设备可以是无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)中的接入点(access point，AP)，也可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication，GSM)或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)。还可以是5G系统中的节点B(5G nodeB，gNB)或者LTE系统中的演进的节点B(evolved nodeB，eNB或者eNodeB)。或者，无线接入网设备还可以是第三代(3rd generation，3G)系统的节点B(Node B)，另外，该无线接入网设备还可以是中继站或接入点，或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及第五代通信(fifth-generation，5G)网络中的无线接入网设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)网络中的无线接入网设备等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备，也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、终端设备单元(subscriber unit)、终端设备站、移动站、移动台(mobile station，MS)、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端(terminal)、无线通信设备、终端设备代理或终端设备装置，具有的功能的可以是：进行下行/侧行信号的接收，和/或，上行/侧行信号的发送。终端设备可以包括各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备。还可以包括用户单元、蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能手机(smart phone)、无线数据卡、个人数字助理(personal digital  assistant，PDA)电脑、平板型电脑、无线调制解调器(modem)、手持设备(handset)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)终端、无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)中的站点(station，ST)。可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站以及下一代通信系统，例如，5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的终端设备等。
以下，对本申请中涉及的相关术语和技术进行解释说明。
(1)基于非码本的上行传输模式
举例来说，当终端设备被配置为基于非码本的上行传输模式时，无线接入网设备向终端设备发送信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)。终端设备接收到CSI-RS之后通过测量得到下行信道质量信息，并根据信道互异性计算得到上行信道质量信息，然后根据上行信道质量信息设计多个预编码矩阵，基于该多个预编码矩阵对多个探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)进行预编码，然后发送经预编码的多个SRS，可选的，一个预编码矩阵对应一个SRS，预编码矩阵用于表征发送天线间的幅度和相位信息；或者一个发送天线对应一个SRS，或者一个发送波束对应一个SRS，发送波束具备方向性；或者，发送的SRS信号在空间的能量分布具备方向性。可选的，多个SRS分别承载于多个SRS资源，或者SRS端口上。无线接入网设备接收到经预编码的多个SRS之后，意味着无线接入网设备可以在多个SRS资源或者SRS端口上分别获取不同的等效信道并进行测量，通过DCI指示将无线接入网设备推荐的一个或者多个SRS资源或者SRS端口发送终端设备，例如，通过SRI指示。终端设备根据SRI指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数，并根据每个SRI指示的SRS资源上发送SRS的预编码矩阵进行PUSCH传输。可选的，SRI指示的SRS资源与PUSCH的DMRS端口一一对应。本申请中，可以称为SRI指示的SRS资源对应的PUSCH传输。
如图2所示，为可适用于本申请实施例的一种基于非码本的上行传输模式的场景示意图。图2所示的SRI可以包括在DCI中。其中，SRI域用于指示配置的多个SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引。终端设备被配置的SRS资源的个数可以是通过无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令配置的。
举例来说，终端设备接收到DCI之后，首先根据上行最大传输层数(即PUSCH支持的最大传输层数(Maximum number of supported layers for PUSCH)，可以标记为L_max)确定一个表格，例如在5G标准中，若L_max＝3，则所确定的表格可以是“Table7.3.1.1.2-30基于PUSCH传输的非码本SRI指示(SRI indication for non-codebook based PUSCH transmission，L_max＝3)”，如表1所示。其中，上行最大传输层数L_max可以是通过无线资源控制RRC信令配置的。然后，终端设备根据被配置的SRS资源的个数(N_SRS)和SRI域携带的索引，确定该表格中的一个单元格，该单元格中的数字表示无线接入网设备推荐的SRS资源的索引，且该单元格中包括的SRS资源的索引的个数表示PUSCH传输层数。例如，参见表1，当终端设备被配置4个SRS资源即N_SRS＝4，且SRI域携带的索引是8时，所确定的单元格中包含1，3，由此可知，无线接入网设备推荐的SRS资源的编号为1和3，SRS资源1和SRS资源3对应PUSCH的传输，且PUSCH传输层数＝2。
表1
索引 SRI(s)，N_SRS＝2 索引 SRI(s)，N_SRS＝3 索引 SRI(s)，N_SRS＝4
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 0，1 2 2 2 2
3 预留(reserved) 3 0,1 3 3
    4 0,2 4 0,1
    5 1,2 5 0,2
    6 0,1,2 6 0,3
    7 预留(reserved) 7 1,2
        8 1,3
        9 2,3
        10 0,1,2
        11 0,1,3
        12 0,2,3
        13 1,2,3
        14-15 预留(reserved)
其中，表1中的索引是指比特域映射的索引(Bit field mapped to index)，该比特域具体是指SRI域。
需要说明的是，上述对基于非码本的上行传输模式的相关说明均是示例，其不构成对本申请中描述的基于非码本的上行传输模式的限定。
(2)基于码本的上行传输模式
举例来说，当终端设备被配置为基于码本的上行传输模式时，终端设备在SRS资源上向无线接入网设备发送SRS；无线接入网设备根据接收到的SRS测量信道条件，并选择合适的PUSCH预编码矩阵和PUSCH传输层数，然后将所选择的PUSCH预编码矩阵和PUSCH传输层数通过DCI下发给终端设备。其中，PUSCH预编码矩阵具体为：通过PUSCH发送数据所使用的预编码矩阵，且预编码矩阵用于指示发送天线的幅度和相位信息，其中，发送天线和SRS资源的各个端口是一一对应的，预编码矩阵的行对应了发送天线或者SRS资源中的SRS端口，预编码矩阵的列对应了PUSCH的传输层。后续，终端可以使用无线接入网设备推荐的PUSCH预编码矩阵和PUSCH传输层数进行PUSCH传输。
如图3所示，为可适用于本申请实施例的一种基于码本的上行传输模式的场景示意图。如图3所示，预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)域(预编码指示)可以包含在DCI中。可选的，DCI还可以包括SRI域。其中：
SRI域用于指示SRS资源的索引，该索引用于指示从配置的多个SRS资源中选择的一个SRS资源。作为一个示例，在基于码本的上行传输模式中，终端设备可以被配置2个SRS资源。若终端设备被配置一个SRS资源，则DCI中可以不包含SRI域，若终端设备被配置2个SRS资源，终端设备可以在不同的SRS资源上采用不同的发送天线，或者不同指向性的发送波束发送SRS，通过SRI指示，无线接入网设备通知终端设备发送PUSCH所采用的发送天线或者发送波束等信息，可以理解的是，预编码矩阵中的每一行对应了无线接入网设备所指示的SRS资源中的每个SRS端口。其中，终端设备被配置的SRS资源的个数可以是通过RRC信令配置的。作为一个示例，每个SRS资源中最多可以 被配置4个SRS端口，其中，每个SRS资源被配置的SRS端口的个数可以是通过RRC信令配置的。
预编码信息和层数指示域用于携带索引，该索引用于指示传输秩指示(transmission rank indicator，TRI)和TPMI。TRI用于配置PUSCH传输层数。TPMI用于配置PUSCH预编码矩阵。
关于天线端口域的相关描述可以参考下文。
举例来说，终端设备接收到DCI之后，首先根据上行最大传输传输层数(如标记为maxRank，maxRank＝L_max)和SRI域指示的SRS资源被配置的SRS端口的个数确定一个表格。例如，在5G标准中，假设maxRank＝2，SRI域指示的SRS资源被配置的SRS端口的个数是2，则所确定的表格可以是“Table 7.3.1.1.2-4预编码信息和层数，对于2个天线端口，不使用变换预编码，maxRank＝2(Precoding information and number of layers，for 2antenna ports，if transform Precoder＝disabled and maxRank＝2)”，Table 7.3.1.1.2-4中的一部分如表2所示。然后，终端设备根据预编码信息和层数域中携带的索引可以确定该表格中的一个单元格，该单元格中包含的层数表示TRI的取值即PUSCH传输层数的取值。例如，假设预编码信息和层数域携带的索引是4，则终端所确定的单元格包含“1layer:TPMI＝3”也就是说，无线接入网设备推荐的TRI＝1即PUSCH传输层数＝1，TPMI的索引值为3。又例如，假设预编码信息和层数域携带的索引是2，则终端所确定的单元格包含“2layer:TPMI＝0”也就是说，无线接入网设备推荐的TRI＝1即PUSCH传输层数＝2，TPMI的索引值为0。
表2
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000001
其中，表2中的索引是指比特域映射的索引，该比特域具体是指预编码信息和层数指示域。
接着，终端设备可以根据SRI域指示的SRS资源被配置的SRS端口的个数和TRI确定一个码本，TPMI用于指示该码本中的一个预编码矩阵。其中，码本是预先存储在无线接入网设备和终端设备中的，该码本中的每个预编码矩阵的行数是SRI域指示的SRS资源被配置的SRS端口的个数，列数是TRI指示的传输层数。例如，在5G标准中，基于上述示例，SRS端口的个数是2，TRI是“1 layer”，则所确定的码本是“Table 6.3.1.5-1 2个天线端口的单层传输的预编码矩阵W(Precoding matrix W for single-layer transmission  using two antenna ports)”，如表3所示。
表3
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000002
例如，假设终端设备所确定的预编码信息和层数域指示的信息是“1layer:TPMI＝3”，那么，参见表3，可以得出无线接入网设备推荐的预编码矩阵是
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000003
需要说明的是，上述对基于码本的上行传输模式的相关说明均是示例，其不构成对本申请中描述的基于码本的上行传输模式的限定。
(3)无线接入网设备通过TPC命令(transmission power control command，TPC Command)调整终端设备的发射功率
无线接入网设备在为终端设备调度资源的时候，为了延长终端设备的电池使用时长，降低小区内部干扰和小区之间的干扰，需要避免过度使用终端设备的发送功率。无线接入网设备通过发送TPC命令来调整终端设备的发射功率，终端设备基于TPC命令，可以采用两种方式来调整上行发射功率：累积(accumulation)方式和绝对(absolute)方式。在累积方式下，终端设备将每次从无线接入网设备接收到的TPC所对应的值累计在一起，累计结果用于调整上行发射功率，应理解的，TPC采用累积方式可以使得上行发送功率值达到动态适配当前信道状态的效果，终端设备在确定当前上行传输的发送功率时，需要将调度当前上行传输时指示的TPC值以及前一段时间内所接收的其他TPC值累计在一起。在绝对方式下，终端设备将每次从无线接入网设备接收到的TPC所对应的值直接用于调整上行发射功率而不累计之前调度所指示的TPC值，上述通过TPC动态调整当前传输的功率值的功控机制可以称为闭环功控机制。终端设备需要根据开环功控机制确定的发送功率值与闭环功控机制确定的发送功率值确定当前上行传输的发送功率。其中，无线接入网设备通过向终端设备发送TPC索引，终端设备通过该索引并根据该终端设备被配置的调整上行发射功率的方式来查表，找到对应的功率调整值后，按照该功率调整值对相应的上行数据进行发射功率的调整。
例如，终端设备的调整发射功率的方式为累积方式，终端设备基于开环功控机制确定的发送功率值为5dBm，无线接入网设备根据5G标准中的表4对终端设备进行功率的调整。无线接入网设备向终端设备第一次发送的TPC域的索引值为0，终端设备收到该索引值后，查表4得出对应的累加调整值为-1dB，则在5dBm的基础上+(-1dB)，那么终端设备此时向无线接入网设备发送PUSCH的功率为4dBm；无线接入网设备向终端设备第二次发送的TPC域的索引值为2，终端设备收到该索引值后，查表4得出对应的累加调整值为1dB，则在4dBm的基础上+(1dB)，那么终端设备此时向无线接入网设备发送PUSCH的功率为5dBm，以此类推。
表4
索引 累加调整值(dB) 绝对调整值(dB)
0 -1 -4
1 0 -1
2 1 1
3 3 4
需要说明的是，上述对无线接入网设备通过TPC调整终端设备上行发射功率的说明均是示例，其不构成对本申请中调整功率的方式的限定。
以下，结合附图对本申请实施例提供的技术方案进行说明。
图4是本申请的一种指示方法100的示意性流程图。
以下以配置的SRS资源集合数量最大为2做示例，本申请不排除配置的SRS资源集合数量大于2的情况。
S110中，无线接入网设备#A确定SRI指示信息#A1。该SRI指示信息#A1用于指示从配置的n个SRS资源中选择属于m个SRS资源集合的SRS资源，其中，n>1，m∈{1,2}，并且m个SRS资源集合中的所有SRS资源为该n个SRS资源；
可选的，一个SRS资源集合对应一套SRS开环功控参数，不同SRS资源集合可以对应不同的SRS开环功控参数。从而，每个TRP可以分别根据不同的SRS资源集合获取上行信道。
其中，该SRI指示信息#A1中包括索引，该索引来自第一索引值集合，该第一索引值集合中存在多个索引值，该多个索引值至少存在两个索引值，称之为第一索引值和第二索引值，第一索引值和第二索引值中每个索引值对应的SRS资源属于2个SRS资源集合，即第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合，该第一索引值对应的SRS资源和该第二索引值对应的SRS资源相同但是顺序不同，可以是第一索引值对应的SRS资源中第一SRS资源集合中的SRS资源在前(即第一个SRS资源属于第一SRS资源集合)，第二SRS资源集合中的SRS资源在后；第二索引值对应的SRS资源中第二SRS资源集合中的SRS资源在前(即第一个SRS资源属于第二SRS资源集合)，第一SRS资源集合中的SRS资源在后。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一索引值集合中包括所述第一索引值，所述第二索引值和第三索引值，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源数量为1，或者，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源属于1个SRS资源集合。
可选的，SRI指示信息的索引值也可以称为状态值，或者比特域字段值。每个索引值会对应不同的指示信息，例如，不同的索引值会对应不同的SRS资源，或者SRS资源集合。该对应关系可以是预先存储在无线接入网设备和终端设备中的。
具体地，SRI指示信息#A1对应的第一索引值集合(本申请中SRI指示信息#A1对应的第一索引值集合可理解为，SRS指示信息#A1包括的索引值，该索引值属于第一索引值集合)中索引的数量取决于配置的SRS资源和/或SRS资源集合的数量。
对基于码本的PUSCH传输而言，当SRS资源集合数量为1时，SRI指示信息#A1对应的第一索引值集合中索引值的数量为n，n为配置的SRS资源的数量，第一索引值集合中的每个索引值分别对应配置的一个SRS资源，不同索引值对应不同的SRS资源；当SRS资源集合数量为2时，则SRI指示信息#A1对应的第一索引值集合中对应SRS资源数量为1的索引值的数量为n，第一索引值集合中还包括至少两个索引值，比如上述第一索引值和第二索引值，可选地，还包括上述第三索引值。
可选的，当SRI指示信息#A1指示了多个SRS资源(或者SRS资源集合)时，不同SRS资源(或者SRS资源集合)对应PUSCH所占用的不同时频资源。示例性的，PUSCH占用两个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号组，每个OFDM符号组对应一个SRI指示信息指示的SRS资源，则每个OFDM符号组上的发送天线或者发送波束可以根据相对应的SRS资源上发送SRS采用的发送天线或者发送波束确定。例如，PUSCH占用时隙slot 0和时隙slot 1，当SRI指示信息指示了两个SRS资源(SRS资源0和SRS资源1)时，slot 0对应SRS资源0，slot 1对应SRS资源1，则终端设备在slot 0上发送PUSCH时，采用在SRS资源0上发送SRS的发送天线、发送波束等，终端设备在slot 1上发送PUSCH时，采用在SRS资源1上发送SRS的发送天线、发送波束等，如图2所示。
可选的，当第一索引值指示了多个SRS资源时，该多个SRS资源分别属于不同的SRS资源集合，或者，可理解为，该第一索引值指示的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合。
在一种可能的实施方式中，无线接入网设备#A确定TPC指示信息#A2，该TPC指示信息用于调整m个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，1≤m≤n。
基于本申请实施例，TPC指示信息#A2仅用于调整SRI指示信息#A1中的索引(应理解，本申请中SRI指示信息#A1中的索引指示的SRS资源，也可表述为SRI指示信息#A1指示的SRS资源)所指示的2个SRS资源中的1个SRS资源对应的PUSCH传输(本申请简称为TPC指示信息#A2作用于1个SRS资源)，或者是TPC指示信息#A2仅用于调整SRI指示信息#A1中的索引所指示的2个SRS资源集合中的1个SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输，2个SRS资源可以属于不同的SRS资源集合。
可选的，SRI指示信息#A1用于指示TPC指示信息#A2所作用的SRS资源。示例性的，第一索引值集合中包括2个索引值(例如索引值#1和索引值#2)，该2个索引值对应2个SRS资源(例如SRS资源1和SRS资源2)，且索引值#1对应的SRS资源和索引值#2对应的SRS资源相同，索引值#1用于指示TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源1，索引值#2用于指示TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源2。
可选的，TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRI指示信息#A1的索引指示的第一个SRS资源或者第一SRS资源集合中的SRS资源。示例性的，第一索引值集合中包括2个索引值(例如索引值#1和索引值#2)，该2个索引值对应2个SRS资源(例如SRS资源1和SRS资源2)，且索引值#1对应的SRS资源和索引值#2对应的SRS资源相同，索引值#1对应的SRS资源的顺序为SRS资源1、SRS资源2，索引值#2对应的SRS资源的顺序为SRS资源2、SRS资源1。则对于索引值1#，TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源1，对于索引值#2，TPC指示信息作用于SRS资源2。
对基于非码本的PUSCH传输而言，当配置的SRS资源集合数量为1时，SRI指示信息#A1包括索引值，该索引值属于第一索引值集合，第一索引值集合中的索引值数量与SRS资源数量n和当前配置的PUSCH的最大传输层数相关，当最大传输层数大于1时，SRI指示信息#A1的索引值可以对应多个SRS资源，SRI指示信息#A1中的索引值所对应的SRS资源数量为PUSCH的传输层数。当配置的SRS资源集合数量为2时，则SRI指示信息#A1对应的第一索引值集合中的索引值中不仅包括对应1个SRS资源集合的索引 值，还包括至少两个索引值，比如上述第一索引值和上述第二索引值，可选地，还包括上述第三索引值。
可选的，当SRI指示信息#A1指示了多个SRS资源(应理解，本申请中SRI指示信息#A1指示了SRS资源，即为SRI指示信息#A1中的索引对应的SRS资源)，且多个SRS资源分别属于不同的SRS资源集合时，不同SRS资源集合对应PUSCH所占用的不同时频资源。示例性的，PUSCH占用两个OFDM符号组，每个OFDM符号组对应SRI指示信息指示的一个SRS资源集合，则每个OFDM符号组上的发送天线或者发送波束可以根据相对应的SRS资源集合中的SRS资源上发送SRS采用的发送天线或者发送波束确定。例如，PUSCH占用slot 0和slot 1，当SRI指示信息指示了两个SRS资源集合(SRS资源集合0和SRS资源集合1)且SRI指示信息指示SRS资源集合0中的SRS资源0和SRS资源1，以及SRS资源集合1中的SRS资源2和SRS资源3时，slot 0对应SRS资源集合0中的SRS资源0和SRS资源1，slot 1对应SRS资源集合1中的SRS资源2和SRS资源3，则终端设备在slot 0上发送PUSCH时，采用在SRS资源集合0中的SRS资源0和SRS资源1上发送SRS的发送天线、发送波束等，终端设备在slot 1上发送PUSCH时，采用在SRS资源集合1中的SRS资源2和SRS资源3上发送SRS的发送天线、发送波束等。此时，在slot 0和slot 1上，PUSCH的传输层数均为2(取决于SRI指示信息中的索引对应的1个SRS资源集合中SRS资源的数量)。
基于本申请实施例，TPC指示信息#A2仅用于调整SRI指示信息#A1所指示的2个SRS资源集合中的1个SRS资源集合中的所有的SRS资源对应的PUSCH传输(本申请简称为TPC指示信息#A2作用于1个SRS资源集合)。
进一步可选的，TPC指示信息#A2仅用于调整SRI指示信息#A1所指示的2个SRS资源集合(例如第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)中的1个SRS资源集合(例如目标SRS资源集合)中的全部或者部分SRS资源对应的PUSCH传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中，目标SRS资源集合可以是第一SRS资源集合与第二SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的第一个SRS资源集合。
可选的，SRI指示信息#A1用于指示TPC指示信息#A1所作用的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合。示例性的，第一索引值集合中包括2个索引值(例如索引值#1和索引值#2)，该2个索引值中每个索引值均对应的2个SRS资源集合(包括SRS资源集合0和SRS资源集合1)，SRS资源集合0包括SRS资源0和1，SRS资源集合1包括SRS资源2和3，且索引值#0对应SRS资源和索引值#1对应的SRS资源相同，索引值#1用于指示TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源集合0中的SRS资源0和/或1，索引值2用于指示TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源集合1中的SRS资源2和/或3。
可选的，TPC指示信息#A作用于SRI指示信息#A1中的索引对应的第一个SRS资源集合中的部分或者全部SRS资源。示例性的，第一索引值集合中包括2个索引值(例如索引值#1和索引值#2)，每个索引值均对应的2个SRS资源集合(包括SRS资源集合0和SRS资源集合1)，且索引值#1对应SRS资源和索引值#2对应的SRS资源相同，索引值#1中指示的SRS资源集合按顺序为SRS资源集合0、SRS资源集合1，索引值2中指示的SRS资源集合按顺序为SRS资源集合1、SRS资源集合0。则对于索引值1，TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源集合0，对于索引值2，TPC指示信息#A2作用于SRS资源集 合1。
本申请实施例中的SRS资源的顺序或者SRS资源集合的顺序可理解为，配置无线接入网设备或者终端设备SRI指示信息索引值与SRS资源编号的映射关系(映射关系表)时，自然地会将SRS资源或者SRS资源集合进行排序，或者按照一定规律布置SRS资源的编号(SRS资源集合的顺序)。
可选的，确定第一索引值集合中第四索引值的分组信息，每个第四索引值仅对应一个SRS资源集合，根据第四索引值的分组信息确定第一索引值集合中第五索引值的分组信息，每个第五索引值对应两个SRS资源集合，第五索引值对应的SRS资源集合中，不同的SRS资源集合(SRS资源集合0和SRS资源集合1)分别对应不同的分组信息。其中，相同分组信息所对应的SRS资源所对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率调整值可以累加。
进一步可选的，第五索引值对应的SRS资源集合中，SRS资源集合0对应的分组信息根据第四索引值中的一个索引值(索引值0)所对应的分组信息确定，SRS资源集合1对应的分组信息根据第四索引值中的另一个索引值(索引值1)所对应的分组信息确定。其中，索引值0对应的SRS资源与第五索引值对应的SRS资源集合0中包括的SRS资源相同，索引值1对应的SRS资源与第五索引值对应的SRS资源集合1中包括的SRS资源相同。
可选的，每个SRS资源仅属于一个SRS资源集合，每个SRS资源集合上发送的SRS可以独立做功率控制。
本申请中，SRI指示信息的索引值也可以称为SRI指示信息的状态值，或者SRI指示信息的指示值。
本申请不排除配置的SRS资源集合的数量大于2的情况。
具体方式如下：
方式一：基于码本的PUSCH传输
当终端设备#A配置的SRS资源为2个SRS资源，2个SRS资源可以属于不同的SRS资源集合时，基于码本的SRI指示对照表如表5所示(假设2个SRS资源为SRS资源0和SRS资源1)。
表5 配置的SRS资源的数量＝2
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0
1 1
2 0,1
3 1,0
可结合表1理解该表5，其中，表5中的SRI指示信息的索引值可以是指示信息#A的比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。例如，当SRI域的索引值为0时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0；当SRI域的索引值为2时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1。无线接入网设备#A根据SRS资源指示终端设备#A选定发送波束/发送天线组。
应理解的，本申请中，不同的SRS资源集合中的SRS资源的可以独立编号，即：SRS资源集合0和1中，SRS资源编号均从0开始，此时通过SRS资源集合区分相同编号的 SRS资源。或者，不同的SRS资源集合中的SRS资源的可以联合编号，即：先编号SRS资源集合0中的SRS资源编号(从0开始)，再编号SRS资源集合1中的SRS资源编号，此时每个SRS资源具备不同的编号。
无线接入网设备#A可将SRS资源进行分组，例如，当有2个TRP时，按照TRP的数量将SRS资源进行分组，将SRS#0配置为第一SRS资源集合，则SRS#0对应终端设备#A到TRP#0的信道；将SRS#1配置为第二SRS资源集合，则SRS#1对应终端设备#A到TRP#1的信道。不同SRS资源集合可以独立确定SRS发送功率。当索引为0或1时，指示有1个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据，当索引为2或3时，指示有2个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据。并且，基于表5，可约定表中的各个索引对应的TPC调整量(也可以叫做TPC指示值)作用的SRS资源(可理解为，TPC调整量作用于SRS资源对应的PUSCH数据的发射功率上)，有以下方式：
方式c
SRI指示信息的索引值对应的TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为指定的SRS资源，例如表5.1。
表5.1 配置的SRS资源的数量＝2
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000004
表5.1中的SRI指示信息的索引值是指示信息#A的比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。其中，TPC调整量对应的SRS资源指的是，TPC调整量调整的上行数据的发射功率，该上行数据是根据SRS资源发送的。索引2和索引3对应的TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为指定的SRS#1，也可以都为SRS#0，也可以索引2对应SRS#0，索引3对应SRS#1，本申请对索引对应TPC调整量对应的SRS资源不作限制。
方式d
SRI指示信息的索引值对应的TPC调整量对应的SRS资源约定为SRS资源组合中的第一个SRS资源或者第二个SRS资源，以此类推；基于表5，也可以约定为第一个SRS资源集合中的部分或者全部SRS资源或者第二个SRS资源集合中的部分或者全部SRS资源，例如表5.2。
表5.2 配置的SRS资源的数量＝2
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000005
以方式d为例，无线接入网设备#A将SRS资源进行分组后，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合确定SRI域的索引，并根据该索引和/或TPC调整量生成指示 信息#A。例如，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，由于SRS#0对应TRP#0，所以可理解为该TPC调整量生效于TRP#0，则根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定SRI域的索引值为0。再例如，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，则可确定SRS资源顺序为SRS#0在前(即第一个SRS资源为SRS#0)，SRS#1在后(即第二个SRS资源为SRS#1)，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定对应的SRI域的索引值为2。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置与SRS资源关联的分组信息，例如t值(需要说明的是，本申请中，t值可以指代分组信息)，使得关联了相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC值可以进行累积，有方式A和方式B。
方式A
配置每个SRS资源各自关联一个t值，例如表6所示。其中，t值和TPC调整量的取值仅为示例，不构成对本申请的限定。表6中，每个索引对应的SRS资源各自关联了一个t值。在此方式中，每个索引对应的TPC作用的t值可以是指定的，即，t值关联了SRI指示信息的索引值。
表6 配置的SRS资源的数量＝2
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000006
假设TPC调整量以上述方式d作用于SRS资源，那么根据表6，累积TPC值的计算如表6.1所示，其中，表6.1中，不同的PUSCH传输时机上发送的PUSCH是由不同的DCI信令调度的，每个DCI信令中均包括一个TPC指示，TPC作用的t值用于指示关联了t值的SRS资源对应的TPC进行累积。假设SRS#0和SRS#1对应地累积TPC初始值都为0dB。
表6.1
SRI指示信息的索引值 #0 #1 #2 #3
TPC调整量 1dB 3dB -1dB 3dB
PUSCH传输时机 0 1 2 3
SRS#0对应的累积TPC 1dB 1dB 0dB 3dB
SRS#1对应的累积TPC 0dB 3dB 3dB 3dB
表6.1中，每个SRS资源关联了不同的t值，在累积TPC时，根据TPC作用的t值各自进行累积，在PUSCH传输时机为3时，SRS#0对应的累积TPC为0dB，SRS#1对应的累积TPC为2dB。
方式B
配置相同资源集合的SRS资源关联相同的t值，相同t值的SRS资源对应的TPC值 可以累积，例如表7所示。其中，t值和TPC调整量的取值仅为示例，不构成对本申请的限定。在此方式中，每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值可以为顺序在前的SRS资源集合(即第一个SRS资源集合)对应的t值。
应理解的，本实施例中，还可以配置SRI指示信息的索引值关联t值。例如，表6或者7所示，SRI指示信息的索引值0和1各自关联了不同的t值，0和1，则SRI指示信息的索引值0和1是第一索引值，SRI指示信息的索引值2和3是第二索引值，索引值2和3关联的分组信息是根据索引值0和1确定的。具体的，索引值2和3中，SRS资源0对应的索引值根据索引值0关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝0，SRS资源1对应的索引值根据索引值1关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝1。此时，索引值2和3可以不用显示配置t值。
可选的，第二索引值还可以显示关联t值，此时，t值仅关联第二索引值指示的多个SRS资源集合中的第一SRS资源集合。
表7
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000007
表7中，SRS#0属于第一SRS资源集合，其关联的t值为0，则SRI域索引值为0，2和3中的SRS#0关联的t值都为0；SRS#1属于第二SRS资源集合，其关联的t值为1，则SRI域索引值为1，2和3中的SRS#1关联的t值都为1。以表8为例，结合表7来进行根据t值计算累积TPC的说明。假设SRS#0和SRS#1对应地累积TPC初始值都为0dB。
表8
SRI指示信息的索引值 #0 #1 #2 #3
TPC调整量 1dB 3dB 1dB 3dB
PUSCH传输时机 0 1 2 3
SRS#0对应的累积TPC 1dB 1dB 2dB 2dB
SRS#1对应的累积TPC 0dB 3dB 3dB 6dB
如表8所示，在PUSCH传输时机为3时，关联了t值为0的SRS#0对应的TPC累积值为2dB，关联了t值为1的SRS#1对应的TPC累积值为6dB。
当配置的SRS资源总数为4时，基于码本的SRI指示对照表如表9所示。
表9 配置的SRS资源数量＝4
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 0,2
5 0,3
6 1,2
7 1,3
8 2,0
9 3,0
10 2,1
11 3,1
12 2,3
13 0,1
14 1,0
15 3,2
可结合表1理解该表9，其中，表9中SRI指示信息的索引值是指示信息#A的比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。例如，当SRI域的索引值为0时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0；当SRI域的索引值为4时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#2。无线接入网设备#A根据SRS资源指示终端设备#A选定发送波束/发送天线组。
表9.1 基于码本的PUSCH传输中SRI指示信息
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 0,2
5 1,3
6 2,0
7 3,1
表9.1中，SRS资源集合0中包括SRS资源0和SRS资源1，SRS资源集合1中包括SRS资源2和SRS资源3。SRS资源0和SRS资源2中包括的SRS端口数相同(例如，均包括4个SRS端口)，SRS资源1和SRS资源3中包括的SRS端口数相同(例如，均包括2个SRS端口)。
无线接入网设备#A可将SRS资源进行分组，例如，当有2个TRP时，按照TRP的数量将SRS资源进行分组，将SRS#0和SRS#1配置为第一SRS资源集合，则SRS#0和SRS#1对应终端设备#A到TRP#0的信道；将SRS#2和SRS#3配置为第二SRS资源集合，则SRS#2和SRS#3对应终端设备#A到TRP#1的信道。不同SRS资源集合可以独立确定SRS发送功率。当索引为0-3时，指示有1个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据，当索引为4-15时，指示有2个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据。该表9中，对于属于同一SRS资源集合的SRS资源的顺序不作限定。并且，可约定表中的各个索引对应的TPC调整量(也可以叫做TPC指示值)对应(作用)的SRS资源，约定的方式可参考上述方式c和方式d，在此不再赘述。
以方式d为例，无线接入网设备#A将SRS资源进行分组后，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合确定SRI域的索引，并根据该索引和/或TPC调整量生成指示信息#A。例如，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，由于SRS#0对应TRP#0，所以可理解为该TPC调整量生效于TRP#0， 则根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定SRI域的索引值为0。再例如，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#2，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源集合为第一SRS资源集合(第二SRS资源集合)，由于SRS#0属于第一SRS资源集合(SRS#2属于第二SRS资源集合)，则可确定SRS资源顺序为SRS#0在前(即第一个SRS资源为SRS#0)，SRS#2在后(SRS#2在前，SRS#0在后)，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定对应的SRI域的索引值为4(8)。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置SRS资源关联的t值，使得相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC值可以进行累积，例如方式C、方式D和方式E。
方式C
配置每个SRS资源各自关联一个t值，例如表10所示。其中，t值仅为示例，不构成对本申请的限定。在此方式中，每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值可以为指定值，即，t值关联了SRI指示信息的索引值。
表10
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000009
根据表10，每个SRS资源分别进行累积TPC的计算，以表11为例，结合表10来进行根据t值计算累积TPC的说明。假设SRS#0和SRS#1对应地累积TPC初始值都为0dB，累积方式例如方式a。
方式a
表11
SRI指示信息的索引值 #0 #2 #5 #11
TPC调整量 -1dB 1dB 2dB 1dB
PUSCH传输时机 0 1 2 3
SRS#0对应的累积TPC -1dB -1dB -1dB -1dB
SRS#1对应的累积TPC 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB
SRS#2对应的累积TPC 0dB 1dB 1dB 1dB
SRS#3对应的累积TPC 0dB 0dB 3dB 4dB
如表11所示，在PUSCH传输时机为3时，关联了t值为0的SRS#0对应的TPC累积值为-1dB，关联了t值为1的SRS#1对应的TPC累积值为0dB，关联了t值为2的SRS#2对应的TPC累积值为1dB，关联了t值为3的SRS#3对应的TPC累积调整量为4dB。
方式D
配置相同资源集合的SRS资源关联相同的t值，例如表12所示。其中，t值和TPC调整量的取值仅为示例，不构成对本申请的限定。在此方式中，每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值可以为顺序在前的SRS资源集合(即第一个SRS资源集合)对应的t值或者顺序在后的SRS资源结合对应的t值，以每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值为顺序在前的SRS资源集合(即第一个SRS资源集合)对应的t值为例，如表12所示。
应理解的，本实施例中，还可以配置SRI指示信息的索引值关联t值。例如，表10和12所示，SRI指示信息的索引值0至3各自关联了不同的t值，0和1，则SRI指示信息的索引值0至3是第一索引值，SRI指示信息的索引值4至15是第二索引值，索引值4至15关联的分组信息是根据索引值0至3确定的。具体的，索引值4至15中，SRS资源0对应的索引值根据索引值0关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝0，SRS资源1对应的索引值根据索引值1关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝0，以此类推。此时，索引值4至15可以不用显示配置t值。
可选的，第二索引值还可以显示关联t值，此时，t值仅关联第二索引值指示的多个SRS资源集合中的第一SRS资源集合。也就是索引值4至15可以显示配置t值，t值对应第一SRS资源集合，例如可以对应指示排序在先的SRS资源集合。
表12
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000011
表12中，SRS#0和SRS#1属于第一SRS资源集合，SRI域索引值为0-15中的SRS#0和SRS#1关联的t值都为0；SRS#2和SRS#3属于第二SRS资源集合，SRI域索引值为0-15中的SRS#2和SRS#3关联的t值都为1。
根据表12，属于相同集合的SRS资源同时进行TPC值的累积。以表13为例，结合表12来进行根据t值计算累积TPC的说明。假设SRS#0和SRS#1对应地累积TPC初始值都为0dB，累积方式例如方式b。
方式b
表13
SRI指示信息的索引值 #0 #2 #5 #11
TPC调整量 -1dB 1dB -1dB 1dB
PUSCH传输时机 0 1 2 3
SRS#0对应的累积TPC -1dB -1dB -2dB -2dB
SRS#1对应的累积TPC -1dB -1dB -2dB -2dB
SRS#2对应的累积TPC 0dB 1dB 1dB 2dB
SRS#3对应的累积TPC 0dB 1dB 1dB 2dB
如表13所示，在PUSCH传输时机为3时，关联了相同t值的SRS#0和SRS#1对应的TPC累积值为-2dB，关联了相同t值的SRS#2和SRS#3对应的TPC累积值为2dB。
方式E
将上述配置t值的方式C和方式D进行组合，即在第一SRS资源集合中的SRS资源关联不同的t值，在第二SRS资源集合中的SRS资源关联相同的t值，例如表14所示。 其中，t值取值仅为示例，不构成对本申请的限定。在此方式中，每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值可以是指定的，也可以是按照SRS资源集合的顺序约定的，以每一个索引对应的TPC作用的t值是指定的为例，即，t值关联了SRI指示信息的索引值，如表14所示。
应理解的，本实施例中，还可以配置SRI指示信息的索引值关联t值。例如，表14所示，SRI指示信息的索引值0至3各自关联了不同的t值，0，1和2，则SRI指示信息的索引值0至3是第一索引值，SRI指示信息的索引值4至15是第二索引值，索引值4至15关联的分组信息是根据索引值0至3确定的。具体的，索引值4至15对应的SRS资源0对应的索引值根据索引值0关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝0，SRS资源1对应的索引值根据索引值1关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝2，以此类推。此时，索引值4至15可以不用显示配置t值。
可选的，第二索引值还可以显示关联t值，此时，t值仅关联第二索引值指示的多个SRS资源集合中的第一SRS资源集合。也就是索引值4至15可以显示配置t值，t值对应第一SRS资源集合，例如可以对应指示排序在先的SRS资源集合。
表14
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000013
表14中，SRS#0和SRS#1属于第一SRS资源集合，但是SRS#0关联的t值为0，SRS#1关联的t值为2，SRI域索引值为0-15中的SRS#0关联的t值都为0，SRI域索引值为0-15中的SRS#1关联的t值都为2；SRS#2和SRS#3属于第二SRS资源集合，则SRI域索引值为0-15中的SRS#2和SRS#3关联的t值都为1。累积TPC的计算可以参照上述方式a和方式b进行类推，在此不再赘述。
方式二：基于非码本的PUSCH传输
当配置的SRS资源总数为2，PUSCH的最大传输层数为1时，基于非码本的SRI指示对照表如表5所示。其资源集合的分配以及TPC计算方式参见方式一中的表6(方式A)和表7(方式B)
当配置的SRS资源总数为4，PUSCH的最大传输层数为1时，基于非码本的SRI指示对照表如表15所示，此时的传输层数(Layer，用L表示)对应SRI域的索引值对应的SRS资源集合中SRS资源的数量。
表15 配置的SRS资源数量＝4，最大传输层数＝1
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0(L＝1)
1 1(L＝1)
2 2(L＝1)
3 3(L＝1)
4 0,2(L＝1)
5 0,3(L＝1)
6 1,2(L＝1)
7 1,3(L＝1)
8 2,0(L＝1)
9 3,0(L＝1)
10 2,1(L＝1)
11 3,1(L＝1)
可结合表1理解该表15，其中，表15中的SRI指示信息的索引值是指示信息#A的比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。例如，当SRI域的索引值为0时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0；当SRI域的索引值为4时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#2。无线接入网设备#A根据SRS资源指示终端设备#A选定发送波束/发送天线组。
应理解的，当SRI指示表15中索引值4-11时，PUSCH的传输层数为1，多个的SRS资源会分别对应PUSCH的不同时频资源。示例性的，当SRI指示索引值4，PUSCH占用的slot 1会对应SRS资源0，PUSCH占用的slot 2会对应SRS资源1。
无线接入网设备#A可将SRS资源进行分组，例如，当有2个TRP时，按照TRP的数量将SRS资源进行分组，将SRS#0和SRS#1配置为第一SRS资源集合，则SRS#0和SRS#1对应终端设备#A到TRP#0的信道；将SRS#2和SRS#3配置为第二SRS资源集合，则SRS#2和SRS#3对应终端设备#A到TRP#1的信道。不同SRS资源集合可以独立确定SRS发送功率。当索引为0-3时，指示有1个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据，当索引 为4-11时，指示有2个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据。表15中，SRI指示信息的索引值对应的SRS资源中，属于同一个SRS资源集合的SRS资源最多只有一个，表明PUSCH的传输层数最大为1。该表15中，对于属于同一SRS资源集合的SRS资源的顺序不作限定。并且，可约定表中的各个索引对应的TPC调整量(也可以叫做TPC指示值)作用的SRS资源，约定的方式可参考上述方式c和方式d，在此不再赘述。
以方式d为例，无线接入网设备#A将SRS资源进行分组后，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合确定SRI域的索引，并根据该索引和/或TPC调整量生成指示信息#A。例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，由于SRS#0对应TRP#0，所以可理解为该TPC调整量生效于TRP#0，则根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定SRI域的索引值为0。再例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#2，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源集合为第一SRS资源集合(第二SRS资源集合)，由于SRS#0属于第一SRS资源集合(SRS#2属于第二SRS资源集合)，则可确定SRS资源顺序为SRS#0在前(即第一个SRS资源为SRS#0)，SRS#2在后(即第二个SRS资源为SRS#2)，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定对应的SRI域的索引值为4。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置SRS资源(或者SRS资源集合)关联的t值，使得关联了相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC值可以进行累积，配置t值的方式参见方式一中的方式C、方式D和方式E，对应的各个累积TPC的方式参见方式一中的方式a和方式b，在此不再赘述。
当配置的SRS资源总数为4，PUSCH的最大传输层数为2时，基于非码本的SRI指示对照表如表16所示，此时的传输层数对应SRI域的索引值对应的SRS资源集合中SRS资源的数量。
表16 配置的SRS资源数量＝4，最大传输层数＝2
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0(L＝1)
1 1(L＝1)
2 2(L＝1)
3 3(L＝1)
4 0,1(L＝2)
5 2,3(L＝2)
6 0,2(L＝1)
7 0,3(L＝1)
8 1,2(L＝1)
9 1,3(L＝1)
10 0,1,2,3(L＝2)
11 2,0(L＝1)
12 3,0(L＝1)
13 2,1(L＝1)
14 3,1(L＝1)
15 2,3,0,1(L＝2)
可结合表1理解该表16，其中，表16中的SRI指示信息的索引值是指示信息#A的比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。例如，当SRI域的索引值为0时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0；当SRI域的索引值为4时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1。无线接入网设备#A根据SRS资源指示终端设备#A选定发送波束/发送天线组。
无线接入网设备#A可将SRS资源进行分组，例如，当有2个TRP时，按照TRP数量对SRS资源进行分组，将SRS#0和SRS#1配置为第一SRS资源集合，则SRS#0和SRS#1对应终端设备#A到TRP#0的信道；将SRS#2和SRS#3配置为第二SRS资源集合，则SRS#2和SRS#3对应终端设备#A到TRP#1的信道。不同SRS资源集合可以独立确定SRS发送功率。当索引为0-5时，指示有1个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据，当索引为6-15时，指示有2个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据。表16中，SRI索引指示的SRS资源集合中，最多有两个SRS资源，所以PUSCH的传输层数最大为2。例如，索引为4时，SRS#0和SRS#1都属于第一SRS资源集合，所以此时PUSCH的传输层数为2。又例如索引为11时，SRS#2属于第二SRS资源集合，SRS#0属于第一SRS资源集合，每个资源集合只有1个SRS资源，所以此时PUSCH的传输层数为1。该表16中，对于属于同一SRS资源集合的SRS资源的顺序不作限定。并且，可约定表中的各个索引对应的TPC调整量(也可以叫做TPC指示值)作用的SRS资源，约定的方式可参考上述方式c和方式d，在此不再赘述。
以方式d为例，无线接入网设备#A将SRS资源进行分组后，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合确定SRI域的索引，并根据该索引和/或TPC调整量生成指示信息#A。例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，由于SRS#0对应TRP#0，所以可理解为该TPC调整量生效于TRP#0，则根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定SRI域的索引值为0。再例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#2，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源集合为第一SRS资源集合(第二SRS资源集合)，由于SRS#0属于第一SRS资源集合(SRS#2属于第二SRS资源集合)，则可确定SRS资源顺序为SRS#0在前(即第一个SRS资源为SRS#0)，SRS#2在后(即第二个SRS资源为SRS#2)，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定对应的SRI域的索引值为6。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置SRS资源关联的t值，来指示对应的TPC调整量，相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC调整量可以进行累积，配置t值的方式参见方式一中的方式C、方式D和方式E，对应的各个累积TPC的方式参见方式一中的方式a和方式b，在此不再赘述。其中，当该表16采用方式E配置t值时，属于同一SRS资源集合的SRS#0和SRS#1配置的t值可以不同(SRS#2和SRS#3配置的t值可以不同)，也就意味着，SRS#0和SRS#1对应的上行发射功率的TPC调整量可以不同。以此类推，本申请实施例中其它可以适用该方式的也在本申请保护的范围内，其它地方不再赘述。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置SRS资源关联的t值，使得关联了相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC值可以进行累积，根据表16配置t值的方式参见方式一中的方式C、方式D和方式E，对应的各个累积TPC的方式参见方式一中的方式a和方式b， 除此之外，配置t值的方式还可以是，t值不仅关联了SRI指示信息的第一索引值集合中的部分索引值，还关联了其余索引值对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合。
在一种可能的实施方式中，无线接入网设备#A根据第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息确定第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，其中，第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1，第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1。例如，表16.1中配置t值的方式。
应理解的，本实施例中，还可以配置SRI指示信息的索引值关联t值。例如，表16.1所示，SRI指示信息的索引值0至5各自关联了不同的t值，0至3，则SRI指示信息的索引值0至5是第一索引值，SRI指示信息的索引值6至15是第二索引值，索引值6至15关联的分组信息是根据索引值0至5确定的。具体的，索引值6至15中，SRS资源0对应的索引值根据索引值0关联的分组信息确定，也就是t＝0，SRS资源0和1对应的索引值根据索引值4关联的分组信息确定，以此类推。此时，索引值6至15可以不用显示配置t值。
可选的，第二索引值还可以显示关联t值，此时，t值仅关联第二索引值指示的多个SRS资源集合中的第一SRS资源集合。也就是索引值6至15可以显示配置t值，t值对应第一SRS资源集合，例如可以对应指示排序在先的SRS资源集合。
表16.1
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000015
表16.1中，SRS#0和SRS#1属于第一SRS资源集合，SRS#2和SRS#3属于第二SRS资源集合，索引0-3中，SRS#0和SRS#1关联的t值为0，即第一SRS资源集合关联的t值为0，SRS#2和SRS#3关联的t值为1，即第二SRS资源集合关联的t值为1，索引6-9，11-14中，每个SRS资源关联的t值为所在集合的t值。索引4中的SRS#0和SRS#1属于同一资源集合，该索引4关联的t值为2，则索引10和15中SRS资源与索引4中的SRS资源属于同一集合的SRS#0和SRS#1关联的t值与索引4相同，为2；同理，索引5中的SRS#2和SRS#3属于同一资源集合，该索引5关联的t值为3，则索引10和15中SRS资源与索引4中的SRS资源属于同一集合的SRS#2和SRS#3关联的t值与索引5相同，为3。可选地，根据约定，索引10和索引15关联的t值为顺序在前的SRS资源集合对应的t值，因此索引10关联的t值为2，索引15关联的t值为3。应理解，在该表16.1中，TPC作用的t值可以是指定的，即，t值关联了SRI指示信息的索引值，也可以是按照SRS资源的顺序约定的，具体方式在上述实施例中以说明，在此不再赘述。
当配置的SRS资源总数为8，PUSCH的最大传输层数为4时，基于非码本的SRI指示对照表如表17所示，此时的传输层数对应SRI域的索引值对应的SRS资源集合中SRS资源的数量。
表17 配置的SRS资源数量＝8，最大传输层数＝4
SRI指示信息的索引值 SRS资源编号
0 0(L＝1)
1 1(L＝1)
2 2(L＝1)
3 3(L＝1)
4 0,1(L＝2)
5 0,2(L＝2)
6 0,3(L＝2)
7 1,2(L＝2)
8 1,3(L＝2)
9 2,3(L＝2)
10 0,1,2(L＝3)
11 0,1,3(L＝3)
12 0,2,3(L＝3)
13 1,2,3(L＝3)
14 0,1,2,3(L＝4)
15 4(L＝1)
16 5(L＝1)
17 6(L＝1)
18 7(L＝1)
19 4,5(L＝2)
20 4,6(L＝2)
21 4,7(L＝2)
22 5,6(L＝2)
23 5,7(L＝2)
24 6,7(L＝2)
25 4,5,6(L＝3)
26 4,5,7(L＝3)
27 4,6,7(L＝3)
28 5,6,7(L＝3)
29 4,5,6,7(L＝4)
30 0,4(L＝1)
… …
45 3,7(L＝1)
46 0,1,4,5(L＝2)
… …
81 2,3,6,7(L＝2)
82 0,1,2,4,5,6(L＝3)
… …
97 1,2,3,5,6,7(L＝3)
98 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7(L＝4)
99 4,0(L＝1)
… …
114 7,3(L＝1)
115 4,5,0,1(L＝2)
… …
150 6,7,2,3(L＝2)
151 4,5,6,0,1,2(L＝3)
… …
166 5,6,7,1,2,3(L＝3)
167 4,5,6,7,0,1,2,3(L＝4)
可结合表1理解该表17，其中，表17中的SRI指示信息的索引值是指示信息#A的 比特域映射的索引，该比特域可以是SRI域。例如，当SRI域的索引值为0时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0；当SRI域的索引值为4时，对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1。无线接入网设备#A根据SRS资源指示终端设备#A选定发送波束/发送天线组。索引为30-45时，传输层数为1，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(x,y)。索引为46-81时，传输层数为2，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x1和x2属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y1和y2属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(x1,x2,y1,y2)。索引为82-97时，传输层数为3，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x1，x2和x3属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y，y2和y3属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(x1,x2,x3,y1,y2,y3)。索引为99-114时，传输层数为1，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(y,x)。索引为115-150时，传输层数为2，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x1和x2属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y1和y2属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(y1,y2,x1,x2)。索引为151-166时，传输层数为3，SRI(s)指示的SRS资源组合规律为：假设x1，x2和x3属于第一SRS资源集合{0,1,2,3}，y，y2和y3属于第二SRS资源集合{4,5,6,7}，则SRS资源的组合方式为(y1,y2,y3,x1,x2,x3)。
无线接入网设备#A可将SRS资源进行分组，例如，当有2个TRP时，按照TRP数量对SRS资源进行分组，将SRS#0、SRS#1、SRS#2和SRS#3配置为第一SRS资源集合(在表17中为{0,1,2,3})，则SRS#0、SRS#1、SRS#2和SRS#3对应终端设备#A到TRP#0的信道；将SRS#4、SRS#5、SRS#6和SRS#7配置为第二SRS资源集合(在表17中为{4,5,6,7})，则SRS#4、SRS#5、SRS#6和SRS#7对应终端设备#A到TRP#1的信道。不同SRS资源集合可以独立确定SRS发送功率。当索引为0-29时，指示有1个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据，当索引为30-167时，指示有2个TRP接收终端设备#A发送的数据(每个索引对应的SRS资源都由两个SRS资源集合中的SRS资源组成)。表17中，SRI索引指示的SRS资源集合中，最多有4个SRS资源，所以PUSCH的传输层数最大为4。例如，索引为4时，SRS#0和SRS#1都属于第一SRS资源集合，所以此时PUSCH的传输层数为2。又例如索引为11时，SRS#0、SRS#1和SRS#3都属于第一SRS资源集合，所以此时PUSCH的传输层数为3。该表17中，对于属于同一SRS资源集合的SRS资源的顺序不作限定。
并且，可约定表中的各个索引对应的TPC调整量(也可以叫做TPC指示值)作用的SRS资源，约定的方式可参考上述方式c和方式d，在此不再赘述。
以方式d为例，无线接入网设备#A将SRS资源进行分组后，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源或者SRS资源集合确定SRI域的索引，并根据该索引和/或TPC调整量生成指示信息#A。例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，由于SRS#0对应TRP#0，所以可理解为该TPC调整量生效于TRP#0，则根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定SRI域的索引值为0。再例如，传输层数为1时，无线接入网设备#A确定了SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#4，并且TPC调整量对应的SRS资源集合为第一SRS资源集合(第二SRS资源集合)，由于SRS#0 属于第一SRS资源集合(SRS#4属于第二SRS资源集合)，则可确定SRS资源顺序为SRS#0在前(即第一个SRS资源为SRS#0)，SRS#4在后(即第二个SRS资源为SRS#4)，根据TPC调整量对应的SRS资源可确定对应的SRI域的索引值为30。
可选地，无线接入网设备#A可以通过配置SRS资源关联的t值，来指示对应的TPC调整量，相同的t值的SRS资源对应的TPC调整量可以进行累积，配置t值的方式参见方式一中的方式C、方式D和方式E，对应的各个累积TPC的方式参见方式一中的方式a和方式b，在此不再赘述。
可选地，当累积TPC的方式采用方式a时，当一个索引对应的SRS资源集合中有2个或者2个以上数量的SRS资源时，与该索引对应的TPC调整量对应的TRP，该TRP所对应的SRS资源集合中的所有SRS资源同时按照该TPC调整量进行调整。
应理解，本申请实施例对SRS资源的分组方式以及每组中的SRS资源的顺序不作限定。
应理解，上述表5-表17仅为示例性说明，其它利用与本申请实施例相同构思或者规律的都在本申请保护的范围内。
S120中，无线接入网设备#A向终端设备#A发送SRI指示信息#A1和TPC指示信息#A2，终端设备#A接收该SRI指示信息#A1和TPC指示信息#A2。
S130中，终端设备#A根据SRI指示信息#A1和TPC指示信息#A2确定SRS资源、TPC调整量对应的TRP以及向TRP发送上行数据的发射功率。
具体地，当传输方式为基于码本时，终端设备#A根据指示信息#A确定SRI域的索引值以及TPC调整量，并根据被配置的SRS资源数量确定要查找的表格，例如S410中的表5或者表9，假设终端设备#A被配置了两个SRS资源，分别为SRS#0和SRS#1，SRS#0对应TRP#0的信道，SRS#1对应TRP#1的信道，终端设备#A根据索引确定表格中对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1，并根据约定确定该索引对应的TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，则终端设备#A按照该TPC调整量调整向TRP#1发送数据的功率。其中，约定的方式可参考S110中的方式c和方式d。
以方式d为例，如果该索引对应的SRS资源属于同一个SRS资源集合，终端设备#A可将该SRS资源集合按照该TPC调整量调整上行发射功率。如果该索引对应的SRS资源属于两个SRS资源集合(第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)，终端设备#A可将顺序在前的资源集合(即第一个SRS资源集合)中的全部或者部分SRS资源作为该TPC调整量对应的SRS资源，并在发送对应的数据时，使用该TPC调整量调整对应数据的发射功率。可选地，终端设备#A还可以根据S110中描述的方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D或者方式E关联t值的方式，确定需要调整上行发射功率的SRS资源集合对应的TRP和/或该SRS资源集合中的全部或者部分SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率，并且结合方式a或者方式b计算TPC调整量的累积值。
具体地，当传输方式为基于非码本时，终端设备#A根据指示信息#A确定SRI域的索引值以及TPC调整量，并根据被配置的SRS资源数量以及PUSCH的最大传输层数确定要查找的表格，例如S110中的表15、表16或者表17，假设终端设备#A被配置了两个SRS资源，分别为SRS#0和SRS#1，SRS#0对应TRP#0的信道，SRS#1对应TRP#1的信道，终端设备#A根据索引确定表格中对应的SRS资源为SRS#0和SRS#1，并根据约定确 定该索引对应的TPC调整量对应的SRS资源为SRS#0，则终端设备#A按照该TPC调整量调整向TRP#1发送数据的功率。其中，约定的方式可参考S110中的方式c和方式d。
以方式d为例，如果该索引对应的SRS资源属于同一个SRS资源集合，终端设备#A可将该SRS资源集合按照该TPC调整量调整上行发射功率。如果该索引对应的SRS资源属于两个SRS资源集合(第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合)，终端设备#A可将顺序在前的资源集合(即第一个SRS资源集合)中的全部或者部分SRS资源作为该TPC调整量对应的SRS资源，并在发送对应的数据时，使用该TPC调整量调整对应数据的发射功率。可选地，终端设备#A还可以根据S110中描述的方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D或者方式E关联t值的方式，确定需要调整上行发射功率的SRS资源集合对应的TRP和/或该SRS资源集合中的全部或者部分SRS资源对应的上行数据的发射功率，并且结合方式a或者方式b计算TPC调整量的累积值。
图5是本申请的一种指示方法200的示意性流程图。
S210中，无线接入网设备#A确定指示信息#B，该指示信息#B用于指示两个TPMI的索引和PUSCH的传输层数；
该指示信息#B中每个索引值对应的两个TPMI具备以下特征：
TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的维度相同(行数和列数)且相干类型相同；和/或，
TPMI指示的预编码矩阵中非零元素的位置相同。
具体的，预编码矩阵(码字)的相干类型包括：非相干，部分相干和完全相干。非相干类型指的是：仅有一个非零功率的天线端口用于一层PUSCH的传输，即，预编码矩阵中的每一列仅有一个非零元素；部分相干类型指的是：有部分非零功率的天线端口用于一层PUSCH的传输，即，预编码矩阵中的每一列仅部分元素为非零元素；完全相干类型指的是：对于每一层PUSCH，所有天线端口均为非零功率，即，预编码矩阵中，每一列所有元素为非零元素。
可选的，两个TPMI分别对应PUSCH的不同时频资源。示例性的，PUSCH占用的slot 1对应TPMI1，PUSCH占用的slot 2对应TPMI2，即：slot 1上发送PUSCH的预编码矩阵根据TPMI1确定，slot 2上发送PUSCH的预编码矩阵根据TPMI2确定。
可选的，两个TPMI指示的非零天线端口相同。
通过上述方式，可以降低DCI开销。具体的，当指示信息#B指示的两个TPMI对应终端设备的发送天线相同时，两个TPMI选择的用于发送PUSCH的天线端口有较大概率相同，从而利用该相关性可以降低两个TPMI的组合数量。
可选的，无线接入网设备#A发送码本子集配置信息A或者B，该码本子集配置信息A用于指示TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的相干类型相同，该码本子集配置信息B用于指示TPMI指示的预编码矩阵中非零元素的位置相同。
具体地，当无线接入网设备#A给终端设备#A配置了2个SRS资源，并且两个SRS资源对应不同的TRP时，可根据发送PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵的特征#A(相干类型)确定2个预编码矩阵的组合方式。其中，特征#A包括以下任意一种：
特征#A1：2个TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的传输层数相同，以及2个TPMI指示的预编码矩阵对应的发送数据的天线端口的数量相同，即两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的数量相同，即，两个预编码矩阵的大小都为M*N(其中，M为 行数，N为列数)，0≤m＜M，0≤n＜N，那么两个预编码矩阵的第n列的非0元素的数量相同。例如表3中，TPMI的索引为0和1的两个预编码矩阵，其第一列的非0元素的数量都为1，则认为这两个预编码矩阵对应的发送数据的天线端口的数量相同；
特征#A2：2个TPMI指示的预编码矩阵的传输层数相同，波形相同，以及2个TPMI指示的预编码矩阵对应的发送数据的天线端口的位置相同，即两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的位置相同，即，两个预编码矩阵的大小都为M*N(其中，M为行数，N为列数)，0≤m＜M，0≤n＜N，那么两个预编码矩阵的第n列的非0元素的数量相同，并且非0元素处于的行数m也相同。例如表3中，TPMI的索引为2、3、4和5的4个预编码矩阵，其第一列的非0元素的位置相同，都处于第一行和第二行，则认为这两个预编码矩阵对应的发送数据的天线端口的位置相同。
例如，根据特征#A2，发送PUSCH数据的2个预编码矩阵的组合方式与TPMI的索引和/或PUSCH的传输层数的对应关系可如表格18-23。
假设天线端口数为2，最大传输层数为2，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的位置相同，当码本子集＝非相关时，可配置两个预编码矩阵相同，如表18所示。
表18 天线端口数量＝2，最大传输层数＝2
预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值 码本子集＝非相关(codebookSubset＝nonCoherent)
0 1 layer：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
1 1 layer：TPMI＝1，TPMI＝1
2 2 layers：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
3 预留(reserved)
表18中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。该配置表18中，例如索引为0时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵都采用天线端口数为2，传输层数为1，并且TPMI索引为0的预编码矩阵。索引为3时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵都采用天线端口数为2，传输层数为2，并且TPMI索引为0的预编码矩阵。
假设天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的位置相同，当码本子集＝非相关时，可配置两个预编码矩阵相同，如表19所示。
表19 天线端口数量＝4，最大传输层数＝1
预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值 码本子集＝非相关(codebookSubset＝nonCoherent)
0 1 layer：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
1 1 layer：TPMI＝1，TPMI＝1
2 1 layer：TPMI＝2，TPMI＝2
3 1 layer：TPMI＝3，TPMI＝3
表19中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。表19的解读可参照表18的 相关说明。
假设天线端口数为4，最大传输层数为4，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的位置相同，当码本子集＝非相关时，可配置两个预编码矩阵相同，如表20所示。
表20 天线端口数量＝4，最大传输层数＝4
预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值 码本子集＝非相关(codebookSubset＝nonCoherent)
0 1 layer：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
1 1 layer：TPMI＝1，TPMI＝1
2 1 layer：TPMI＝2，TPMI＝2
3 1 layer：TPMI＝3，TPMI＝3
4 2 layers：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
5 2 layers：TPMI＝1，TPMI＝1
6 2 layers：TPMI＝2，TPMI＝2
7 2 layers：TPMI＝3，TPMI＝3
8 2 layers：TPMI＝4，TPMI＝4
9 2 layers：TPMI＝5，TPMI＝5
10 3 layers：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
11 4 layers：TPMI＝0，TPMI＝0
12-15 预留(reserved)
表20中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。表20的解读可参照表18的相关说明。
假设天线端口数为4，最大传输层数为1，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(处于相同位置的列)的非0元素的位置相同，当码本子集＝部分和非相关时，配置如表21所示。
表21 天线端口数量＝4，最大传输层数＝1
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000017
表21中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。该配置表21中，例如索引为0时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵都采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为0的预编码矩阵。索引为12时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为4和5的预编码矩阵，这两个预编码矩阵的非0元素的位置相同。
假设天线端口数为4，最大传输层数为4，并且，传输层数包括2和3，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(此处“对应的列”指的是，都是第n列)的非0元素的位置相同(此处“位置相同”指的是，非0元素都位于第m行第n列)，当码本子集＝部分和非相关时，配置如表22所示。
表22 天线端口数量＝4，最大传输层数＝4
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000019
表22中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。该配置表22中，例如索引为0时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵都采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为0的预编码矩阵。索引为32时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为4和5的预编码矩阵，这两个预编码矩阵的非0元素的位置相同。
假设天线端口数为4，最大传输层数为1，根据两个预编码矩阵对应的列(此处“对应的列”指的是，都是第n列)的非0元素的位置相同(此处“位置相同”指的是，非0元素都位于第m行第n列)，当码本子集＝全部、部分和非相关时，配置如表23所示。
表23 天线端口数量＝4，最大传输层数＝1
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2021072298-appb-000021
表23中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值指的是指示信息#B的比特域映射的索引，比特域可以是SRI域。其中“码本子集(codebookSubset)”可以承载于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令中，用于指示码本子集的配置。表23中，索引0-27指示的TPMI的索引分别对应TPMI的索引为0-27，索引37-276指示的TPMI的索引为12-27的两两组合的全组合并且去掉索引相同的16种情况后的索引，即全组合一共有16*16＝256种组合，其中索引相同的组合有16种，例如“TPMI＝12，TPMI＝12”或者“TPMI＝13，TPMI＝13”，所以，索引37-276对应的剩下的240种TPMI索引的组合，在此不再赘述。该配置表23中，例如索引为0时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵都采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为0的预编码矩阵。又例如，索引为28时，代表向两个TRP发送的PUSCH数据的预编码矩阵采用天线端口数为4，传输层数为1，TPMI索引为4和5的预编码矩阵，这两个预编码矩阵的非0元素的位置相同。
S220中，无线接入网设备#A向终端设备#A发送指示信息#B，终端设备#A接收该指示信息#B。
S230中，终端设备#A根据指示信息#B中的预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值，确定对应的传输层数和TPMI索引，并根据TPMI索引和传输层数通过查表找到对应的预编码矩阵。
具体地，终端设备#A根据指示信息#B中的索引，通过查表，例如表18至表23，确定2个TRP对应的PUSCH的传输层数以及TPMI的索引，然后根据TPMI的索引通过查表，该表表示的是TPMI的索引和预编码矩阵的对应关系，确定2个TRP对应的预编码矩阵，例如表“Table 6.3.1.5-1 2个天线端口的单层传输的预编码矩阵W(Precoding matrix W for single-layer transmission using two antenna ports)”。
应理解，本申请中的“终端设备#A查表”只是终端设备#A查找索引(SRI指示信息的索引值、预编码矩阵和传输层数索引值)与SRS资源编号或者其它信息的一种形式，本申请并不限定其对应关系以何种形式表示出来。
以上，结合图4和图5描述了根据本申请实施例的指示方法，以下，结合图6至图9描述根据本申请实施例的设备。
图6是根据本申请实施例的终端设备的一例的示意性框图。如图6所示，终端设备300包括：
接收单元310，所述接收单元310用于接收SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括的索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同；
发送单元330，所述发送单元330根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述SRI包括所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，所述终端设备还包括：所述接收单元310还用于接收传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个；处理单元320，所述处理单元320用于根据所述SRI确定所述第一SRS资源集合，其中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同；所述第一SRS资源集合为所述第一个SRS资源所属的SRS资源集合。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理单元320还用于确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述处理单元320根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述处理单元320根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述处理单元320还用于分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
图7是根据本申请实施例的无线接入网设备的一例的示意性框图。如图7所示，无线接入网设备400包括：
处理单元410，所述处理单元410用于确定SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括的索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的待调整功率的SRS资源集合不同，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；
发送单元420，所述发送单元420用于发送所述SRI。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理单元410还用于确定传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的 PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个，所述SRI包括所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同；所述处理单元410确定所述第一SRS资源集合，并根据所述第一SRS资源集合确定所述SRI；所述发送单元420发送所述TPC指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同；所述第一SRS资源集合为所述第一个SRS资源所属的SRS资源集合。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理单元410确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；所述处理单元410根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；所述处理单元410根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；所述处理单元410分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
图8是根据本申请实施例的终端设备的另一例的示意性框图。如图8所示，所述终端设备500包括收发机510以及处理器520。所述处理器520被配置为支持终端设备执行上述方法中终端设备相应的功能。可选的，所述终端设备500还可以包括存储器530，所述存储器530用于与处理器520耦合，保存终端设备500必要的程序指令和数据。处理器520具体用于执行存储器530中存储的指令，当指令被执行时，所述终端设备执行上述方法中终端设备所执行的方法。
需要说明的是，图6中所示的终端设备300可以通过图8中所示的终端设备500来实现。例如，图6中所示接收单元310和发送单元330可以由收发机510实现，处理单元320可以由处理器520实现。
图9是根据本申请实施例的无线接入网设备的另一例的示意性框图。如图9所示，所述无线接入网设备600包括收发机610以及处理器620，所述处理器620被配置为支持无线接入网设备执行上述方法中无线接入网设备相应的功能。可选的，所述无线接入网设备还可以包括存储器630，所述存储器630用于与处理器620耦合，保存无线接入网设备必要的程序指令和数据。处理器620具体用于执行存储器630中存储的指令，当指令被执行时，所述无线接入网设备执行上述方法中无线接入网设备所执行的方法。
需要说明的是，图7中所示的无线接入网设备400可以通过图9中所示的无线接入网设备600来实现。例如，图7中所示发送单元420可以由收发机610实现，处理单元410可以由处理器620实现。
需要说明是，本申请以终端设备和无线接入网设备为例，描述本申请实施例的一种指 示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备。应理解，本申请实施例的一种指示方法还可以由两个基带芯片实现，该两个基带芯片中第一基带芯片用于实现本申请实施例中终端设备的相关操作，该两个基带芯片中的第二基带芯片用于实现本申请实施例中无线接入网设备的相关操作。
还需要说明是，该第一基带芯片的输入/输出电路能够用于实现上文终端设备的收发机的相关操作，该第二基带芯片的输入/输出电路能够用于实现上文无线接入网设备的收发机的相关操作。
应理解，本申请实施例中，该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者无线接入网设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (33)

  1. 一种指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备接收探测参考信号SRS的资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合；
    所述终端设备根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备接收传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个；
    所述终端设备根据所述SRI确定所述第一SRS资源集合，其中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
  4. 如权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；
    所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
  5. 如权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；
    所述终端设备根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；
    所述终端设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，所述方法包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；
    所述终端设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
  7. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法，所述方法包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
  8. 一种指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    无线接入网设备确定探测参考信号SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所 述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；
    所述无线接入网设备发送所述SRI。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    所述无线接入网设备确定传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同；
    所述无线接入网设备确定所述第一SRS资源集合，并根据所述第一SRS资源集合确定所述SRI；
    所述无线接入网设备发送所述TPC指示信息。
  10. 如权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
  11. 如权利要求8-10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；
    所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
  12. 如权利要求8-11中任一项所述的方法，所述方法还包括：
    所述无线接入网设备确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；
    所述无线接入网设备根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；
    所述无线接入网设备根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法，所述方法包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；
    所述无线接入网设备分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法，所述方法包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
  15. 一种终端设备，其特征在于，所述终端设备包括：
    接收单元，所述接收单元用于接收探测参考信号SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索 引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合；
    发送单元，所述发送单元根据所述SRI发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，所述终端设备还包括：
    所述接收单元还用于接收传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个；
    处理单元，所述处理单元用于根据所述SRI确定所述第一SRS资源集合，其中，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同。
  17. 如权利要求16所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述终端设备还包括：
    所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
  18. 如权利要求15-17中任一项所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述终端设备还包括：
    所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；
    所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
  19. 如权利要求15-18中任一项所述的终端设备，所述终端设备还包括：
    所述处理单元还用于确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；
    所述处理单元根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；
    所述处理单元根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的终端设备，所述终端设备包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；
    所述处理单元还用于分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的终端设备，所述终端设备包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
  22. 一种无线接入网设备，其特征在于，所述无线接入网设备包括：
    处理单元，所述处理单元用于确定SRS资源指示信息SRI，所述SRI包括索引值，所述索引值属于第一索引值集合，所述第一索引值集合中包括第一索引值和第二索引值，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应相同的多个SRS资源，所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的SRS资源属于多个SRS资源集合，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值分别对应不同的待调整功率的SRS资源集合，所述SRI用于指示终端设备发送物理上行共享信道PUSCH数据；
    发送单元，所述发送单元用于发送所述SRI。
  23. 如权利要求22所述的无线接入网设备，其特征在于，所述无线接入网设备包括：
    所述处理单元还用于确定传输功率控制TPC指示信息，所述TPC指示信息用于调整所述多个SRS资源集合中第一SRS资源集合对应的PUSCH传输的发送功率，所述第一SRS资源集合为所述多个SRS资源集合中的一个，所述索引值是所述第一索引值或者所述第二索引值，并且所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一SRS资源集合不同；
    所述处理单元确定所述第一SRS资源集合，并根据所述第一SRS资源集合确定所述SRI；
    所述发送单元发送所述TPC指示信息。
  24. 如权利要求23所述的无线接入网设备，其特征在于，所述无线接入网设备还包括：
    所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值对应的第一个SRS资源不同，其中，所述第一个SRS资源为所述第一SRS资源集合中顺序为第一的SRS资源。
  25. 如权利要求22-24中任一项所述的无线接入网设备，其特征在于，所述无线接入网设备还包括：
    所述多个SRS资源集合中还包括第二SRS资源集合；
    所述第一SRS资源集合和所述第二SRS资源集合对应所述PUSCH的不同时域单元。
  26. 如权利要求22-25中任一项所述的无线接入网设备，所述无线接入网设备还包括：
    所述处理单元确定所述第一索引值集合中第三索引值对应的分组信息，所述第三索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量为1；
    所述处理单元根据所述第三索引值对应的分组信息确定所述第一索引值集合中第四索引值对应的分组信息，所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源集合数量大于1；
    所述处理单元根据所述分组信息确定所述PUSCH的发送功率。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的无线接入网设备，所述无线接入网设备包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括属于第一SRS资源集合和第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源；
    所述处理单元分别确定属于所述第一SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息和属于所述第二SRS资源集合的SRS资源对应的分组信息。
  28. 如权利要求26或27所述的无线接入网设备，所述无线接入网设备包括：
    所述第四索引值对应的SRS资源中包括第一SRS资源，所述第一SRS资源与所述第三索引值对应的第二SRS资源属于相同的SRS资源集合；所述第一SRS资源对应的分组信息与所述第三索引值对应的分组信息相同。
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，
    使得装置执行如权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法，或者
    使得装置执行如权利要求8至14中任意一项所述的方法。
  30. 一种芯片系统，其特征在于，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，
    使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法；或者
    使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信装置执行如权利要求8至14中任意一项所述的方法。
  31. 一种无线通信的装置，其特征在于，包括：
    用于实现权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法的单元；或者
    用于实现权利要求8至14中任一项所述的方法的单元。
  32. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被终端设备运行时，使得所述终端设备执行如权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法。
  33. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被无线接入网设备运行时，使得所述无线接入网设备执行如权利要求8至14中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/072298 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备 WO2022151414A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180062374.4A CN116114344A (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备
PCT/CN2021/072298 WO2022151414A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备
EP21918618.6A EP4250846A4 (en) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 DISPLAY METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE AND RADIO ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE
JP2023542775A JP2024502874A (ja) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 指示方法、端末デバイス、および無線アクセスネットワークデバイス
US18/344,225 US20230344585A1 (en) 2021-01-15 2023-06-29 Indication method, terminal device, and radio access network device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072298 WO2022151414A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/344,225 Continuation US20230344585A1 (en) 2021-01-15 2023-06-29 Indication method, terminal device, and radio access network device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022151414A1 true WO2022151414A1 (zh) 2022-07-21

Family

ID=82446915

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/072298 WO2022151414A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20230344585A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4250846A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2024502874A (zh)
CN (1) CN116114344A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022151414A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110383905A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2019-10-25 华为技术有限公司 上行链路传输的功率控制方法
CN110536452A (zh) * 2019-09-03 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种指示方法、装置和存储介质
CN111294909A (zh) * 2017-10-19 2020-06-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 无线通信方法和设备
WO2020198667A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 Apple Inc. Handling uplink transmissions for multi-trp operation

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020064727A1 (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-04-02 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Restricting sounding reference signal (srs) power control configurations
CN113316950A (zh) * 2019-02-03 2021-08-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 传输信号的方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN114585099A (zh) * 2020-12-02 2022-06-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Pusch的调度传输方法、终端和网络侧设备

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110383905A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2019-10-25 华为技术有限公司 上行链路传输的功率控制方法
CN111294909A (zh) * 2017-10-19 2020-06-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 无线通信方法和设备
WO2020198667A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 Apple Inc. Handling uplink transmissions for multi-trp operation
CN110536452A (zh) * 2019-09-03 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种指示方法、装置和存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO, INC: "Discussion on MTRP for reliability", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2006719, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200817 - 20200828, 7 August 2020 (2020-08-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051915450 *
See also references of EP4250846A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2024502874A (ja) 2024-01-23
EP4250846A4 (en) 2024-01-17
CN116114344A (zh) 2023-05-12
US20230344585A1 (en) 2023-10-26
EP4250846A1 (en) 2023-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3817479B1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US11463994B2 (en) Method of sending transmission configuration indication TCI, network-side device, and terminal device
US10742286B2 (en) Resource allocation techniques for beamforming training
US11190323B2 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2019096235A1 (zh) 接收参考信号的方法和发送参考信号的方法
CN110475266B (zh) 通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
KR20220038095A (ko) 풀 전력 상향링크 전송 방법 및 장비
WO2019096232A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
US11770833B2 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2018126944A1 (zh) 信道状态信息测量的配置方法及相关设备
CN113872647A (zh) 探测参考信号srs传输方法及通信装置
WO2022152832A1 (en) Enhancements for beam group reporting in multi-trp scenarios
CN115276737B (zh) 通信方法、装置、终端和存储介质
WO2022151414A1 (zh) 一种指示方法、终端设备和无线接入网设备
WO2019024786A1 (zh) 通信方法和网络设备
WO2022193260A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2022147735A1 (zh) 确定发送功率的方法及装置
WO2023011617A1 (zh) 一种获取信息的方法和装置
WO2020061942A1 (zh) 功率分配的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US20220322396A1 (en) Method and apparatus for indicating number of repetitions
WO2023078429A1 (zh) Srs传输功率确定方法、设备、装置及存储介质
CA3053862C (en) Reference signal sending method, reference signal receiving method, network device, and terminal device
WO2022227033A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
US20230077947A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023206528A1 (en) Multiple panel transmissions in wireless communication systems

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21918618

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021918618

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230623

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023542775

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE